]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Note that the linker's --compress-debug-sections option overrides the compression...
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
b8871f35
L
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
cd6d6c15 1099@item defs
560e09e9 1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1101shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1102
6aa29e7b
JJ
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
b039ef04
L
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
5fa222e4
AM
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
cd6d6c15
NC
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
b8871f35
L
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
cd6d6c15 1143@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
6aa29e7b
JJ
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
8dfef1bd
L
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
6aa29e7b
JJ
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
cd6d6c15
NC
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
6aa29e7b
JJ
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
24718e3b
L
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
04c3a755
NS
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
d258b828
IZ
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
889c2a67
L
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
aec6b87e
L
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
4c10bbaa
L
1216@item noreloc-overflow
1217Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
caa65211
L
1221@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
cd6d6c15
NC
1235@end table
1236
ece2d90e 1237Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1238
1239@kindex -(
1240@cindex groups of archives
1241@item -( @var{archives} -)
1242@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253resolved.
1254
1255Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257more archives.
1258
69da35b5
NC
1259@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1264recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1265and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1270
4a43e768
AM
1271@kindex --as-needed
1272@kindex --no-as-needed
1273@item --as-needed
1274@itemx --no-as-needed
1275This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1276on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1277the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1279needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1280emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1282the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1284Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1288
e56f61be
L
1289@kindex --add-needed
1290@kindex --no-add-needed
1291@item --add-needed
1292@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1293These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1297
252b5132
RH
1298@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299@item -assert @var{keyword}
1300This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302@kindex -Bdynamic
1303@kindex -dy
1304@kindex -call_shared
1305@item -Bdynamic
1306@itemx -dy
1307@itemx -call_shared
1308Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1313@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1314
a1ab1d2a
UD
1315@kindex -Bgroup
1316@item -Bgroup
1317Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1320@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1322
252b5132
RH
1323@kindex -Bstatic
1324@kindex -dn
1325@kindex -non_shared
1326@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1327@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx -dn
1329@itemx -non_shared
1330@itemx -static
1331Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1335library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1336option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1340libraries.
252b5132
RH
1341
1342@kindex -Bsymbolic
1343@item -Bsymbolic
1344When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1347within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1352
40b36307
L
1353@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1356symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1357This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1360This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1361libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1362
55255dae
L
1363@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371which support shared libraries.
1372
1373The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
40b36307
L
1376@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377@item --dynamic-list-data
1378Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
0b8a70d9
L
1385@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
252b5132
RH
1389@kindex --check-sections
1390@kindex --no-check-sections
1391@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1392@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1393Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1394been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1395perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1398restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1399Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401option.
252b5132 1402
ddbb8a31
NC
1403@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1407This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1408by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1409command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1410output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1411input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1412specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1413follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1415
1416This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1417libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1423symbols.
1424
252b5132
RH
1425@cindex cross reference table
1426@kindex --cref
1427@item --cref
1428Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1436definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438symbol are listed.
252b5132 1439
4818e05f
AM
1440@cindex common allocation
1441@kindex --no-define-common
1442@item --no-define-common
1443This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
252b5132 1458@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1459@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1461Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1468using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1471
1472@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1473@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1474@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1475@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1476@itemx --no-demangle
1477These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1481mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1484demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1486
1487@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1488@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1489@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490@item -I@var{file}
1491@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1492Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495doing.
1496
9b8b325a
RF
1497@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498@item --no-dynamic-linker
1499When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
7ce691ae 1504@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1505@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1506@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1507@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512@item --force-exe-suffix
1513Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522@kindex --gc-sections
1523@kindex --no-gc-sections
1524@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1525@item --gc-sections
1526@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1527Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1528targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1529performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1530@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1533
d5465ba2
AM
1534@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
ac69cbc6 1544This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1545@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1546specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
c17d87de
NC
1549@kindex --print-gc-sections
1550@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551@cindex garbage collection
1552@item --print-gc-sections
1553@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559line.
1560
30824704
RM
1561@kindex --print-output-format
1562@cindex output format
1563@item --print-output-format
1564Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
3604cb1f
TG
1568@kindex --print-memory-usage
1569@cindex memory usage
1570@item --print-memory-usage
1571Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577@smallexample
1578Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581@end smallexample
1582
252b5132
RH
1583@cindex help
1584@cindex usage
1585@kindex --help
1586@item --help
1587Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
ea20a7da
CC
1589@kindex --target-help
1590@item --target-help
1591Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1595Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1596@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1597
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@kindex --no-keep-memory
1600@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1601@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1603instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1604necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1605while linking a large executable.
1606
1607@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1608@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1609@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1610@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1611Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1615libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1616
aa713662
L
1617@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618@kindex -z muldefs
1619@item --allow-multiple-definition
1620@itemx -z muldefs
1621Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623first definition will be used.
1624
b79e8c78 1625@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1626@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1627@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1628@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1629Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1630This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
903249d7
NC
1635The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638a shared library.
1639
1640The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643@itemize @bullet
1644@item
1645A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647resolvable at load time.
1648@item
1649There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655appropriate memset function.
1656@end itemize
b79e8c78 1657
31941635
L
1658@kindex --no-undefined-version
1659@item --no-undefined-version
1660Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662will be issued instead.
1663
3e3b46e5
PB
1664@kindex --default-symver
1665@item --default-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1667exported symbols.
1668
1669@kindex --default-imported-symver
1670@item --default-imported-symver
1671Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1673
252b5132
RH
1674@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1676Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1677files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1679This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1680errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682inappropriate.
1683
fe7929ce
AM
1684@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@kindex --no-whole-archive
1690@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1691Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1692archive files.
1693
1694@cindex output file after errors
1695@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696@item --noinhibit-exec
1697Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
0a9c1c8e
CD
1702@kindex -nostdlib
1703@item -nostdlib
1704Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
252b5132 1708@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1709@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1711@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1713@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1714object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1716should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722@end ifclear
1723
76359541
TP
1724@kindex --out-implib
1725@item --out-implib @var{file}
1726Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
36af4a4e
JJ
1734@kindex -pie
1735@kindex --pic-executable
1736@item -pie
1737@itemx --pic-executable
1738@cindex position independent executables
1739Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1742address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1743normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
252b5132
RH
1746@kindex -qmagic
1747@item -qmagic
1748This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750@kindex -Qy
1751@item -Qy
1752This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754@kindex --relax
1755@cindex synthesizing linker
1756@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1757@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1758@item --relax
28d5f677 1759@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1760An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1761@ifset GENERIC
1762This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763@end ifset
1764@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1765@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1766@end ifset
1767@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1768@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1769@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1770@ifset XTENSA
1771@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1773@ifset M68HC11
1774@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1776@ifset NIOSII
1777@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1779@ifset POWERPC
1780@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781@end ifset
252b5132 1782
28d5f677
NC
1783On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1787instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1788
1789On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1792This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1794@end ifset
1795
1796@ifset GENERIC
1797On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798but ignored.
1799@end ifset
1800
28d5f677
NC
1801On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
252b5132
RH
1804@cindex retaining specified symbols
1805@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1809Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812@ifset GENERIC
1813(such as VxWorks)
1814@end ifset
1815where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816run-time memory.
1817
1818@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1825@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1826@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1827@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1828Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1829linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1830arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1831them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1832also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1834@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1835ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
ff5dcc92 1838The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1839SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1840@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1844file systems.
252b5132 1845
ff5dcc92 1846For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1847followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1848the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1849@end ifset
1850
1851@ifset GENERIC
1852@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1853@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1855When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857of the input files.
1858
1859When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1862explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1863specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1864@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1865either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866appearing multiple times.
1867
28c309a2
NC
1868This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1869that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1870is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1871runtime linker would do.
1872
252b5132 1873The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1874libraries:
252b5132
RH
1875@enumerate
1876@item
ff5dcc92 1877Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1878@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1879Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1880between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1881specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1882used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1883at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1884by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1885the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1886@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1887On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1888@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1889environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1890@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1891On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1892directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1893@item
a1b8d843 1894For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1895variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1896@item
ec4eb78a
L
1897For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1898@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1899libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1900@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1901@item
252b5132
RH
1902The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1903@item
1904For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1905exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1906@end enumerate
1907
1908If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1909warning and continue with the link.
1910@end ifset
1911
1912@kindex -shared
1913@kindex -Bshareable
1914@item -shared
1915@itemx -Bshareable
1916@cindex shared libraries
1917Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1918and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1919shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1920undefined symbols in the link.
1921
252b5132 1922@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1923@item --sort-common
1924@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1925@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1926This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1927ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1928sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1929eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1930between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1931specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1932
2509a395
SL
1933@kindex --sort-section=name
1934@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1935This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1936patterns in the linker script.
1937
2509a395
SL
1938@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1939@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1940This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1941patterns in the linker script.
1942
252b5132 1943@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1944@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1945Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1946each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1947size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1948
1949@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1950@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1951Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1952output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1953This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1954certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1955cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1956that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1957support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1958input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1959more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1960many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1961
1962@kindex --stats
1963@item --stats
1964Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1965as execution time and memory usage.
1966
2509a395 1967@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1968@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1969Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1970configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1971that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1972
252b5132
RH
1973@kindex --traditional-format
1974@cindex traditional format
1975@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1976For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1977the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1978use the traditional format instead.
1979
1980@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1981For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1982symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1983full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1984@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1985trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1986combine duplicate entries.
1987
2509a395
SL
1988@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1989@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1990Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1991address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1992times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1993line.
1994@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1995for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1996@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1997should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1998sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1999
2509a395
SL
2000@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2001@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2002@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2003@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2004@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2005@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2006@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2007Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2008@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2009
2509a395
SL
2010@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2011@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2012@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2013When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2014byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2015
9d5777a3
RM
2016@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2017@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2018@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2019When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2020the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2021text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2022
0d705e9f
AM
2023@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2024@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2025@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2026When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2027model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2028
560e09e9
NC
2029@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2030@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2031Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2032values for @samp{method}:
2033
2034@table @samp
2035@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2036Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2037
2038@item report-all
da8bce14 2039Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2040
2041@item ignore-in-object-files
2042Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2043ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2044
2045@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2046Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2047ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2048when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2049libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2050command line.
2051@end table
2052
2053The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2054by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2055
2056Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2057unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2058can change this to a warning.
2059
1715a13c
L
2060@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2061@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2062@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2063@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2064Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2065supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2066the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2067argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2068
2069@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2070@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2071@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2072Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2073used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2074about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2075is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2076see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2077use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2078symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2079@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2080
7ce691ae 2081@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2082@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2083@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2084@item --warn-common
2085Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2086a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2087but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2088you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2089Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2090warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2091
2092There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2093
2094@table @samp
2095@item int i = 1;
2096A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2097file.
2098
2099@item extern int i;
2100An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2101There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2102variable somewhere.
2103
2104@item int i;
2105A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2106variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2107The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2108single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2109size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2110a definition of the same variable.
2111@end table
2112
2113The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2114Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2115just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2116encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2117a common symbol.
2118
2119@enumerate
2120@item
2121Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2122definition for the symbol.
2123@smallexample
2124@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2125 overridden by definition
2126@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2127@end smallexample
2128
2129@item
2130Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2131the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2132except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2133@smallexample
2134@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overriding common
2136@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2137@end smallexample
2138
2139@item
2140Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2141@smallexample
2142@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2143 of `@var{symbol}'
2144@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2145@end smallexample
2146
2147@item
2148Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2149@smallexample
2150@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2151 overridden by larger common
2152@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2153@end smallexample
2154
2155@item
2156Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2157the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2158encountered in a different order.
2159@smallexample
2160@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overriding smaller common
2162@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2163@end smallexample
2164@end enumerate
2165
2166@kindex --warn-constructors
2167@item --warn-constructors
2168Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2169object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2170detect the use of global constructors.
2171
2172@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2173@item --warn-multiple-gp
2174Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2175This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2176Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2177section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2178of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2179base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2180base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2181bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2182large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2183values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2184option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2185
2186@kindex --warn-once
2187@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2188@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2189@item --warn-once
2190Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2191which refers to it.
2192
2193@kindex --warn-section-align
2194@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2195@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2196@item --warn-section-align
2197Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2198alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2199The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2200is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2201the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2202
8fdd7217
NC
2203@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2204@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2205Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2206
a0c402a5
L
2207@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2208@item --warn-alternate-em
2209Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2210
560e09e9
NC
2211@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2212@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2213If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2214@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2215This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2216
2217@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2218@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2219This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2220it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2221
252b5132
RH
2222@kindex --whole-archive
2223@cindex including an entire archive
2224@item --whole-archive
2225For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2226@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2227in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2228files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2229library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2230library. This option may be used more than once.
2231
7ec229ce 2232Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2233about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2234Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2235list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2236your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2237
2509a395
SL
2238@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2239@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2240Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2241@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2242undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2243@var{symbol}.
2244
2245This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2246wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2247wishes to call the system function, it should call
2248@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2249
2250Here is a trivial example:
2251
2252@smallexample
2253void *
cc2f008e 2254__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2255@{
cc2f008e 2256 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2257 return __real_malloc (c);
2258@}
2259@end smallexample
2260
ff5dcc92 2261If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2262all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2263instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2264call the real @code{malloc} function.
2265
2266You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2267links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2268you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2269file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2270call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2271
6aa29e7b 2272@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2273@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2274@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2275@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2276Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2277(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2278section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2279
e41b3a13
JJ
2280@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2281@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2282Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2283generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2284if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2285
6c1439be
L
2286@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2287@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2288@item --enable-new-dtags
2289@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2290This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2291systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2292@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2293and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2294If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2295created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2296those options are only available for ELF systems.
2297
2d643429 2298@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2299@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2300Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2301close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2302time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2303increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2304value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2305
fdc90cb4
JJ
2306@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2307@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2308Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2309@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2310new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2311the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2312hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2313
0ce398f1
L
2314@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2315@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2316@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2317@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2318@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2319@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2320@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2321@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2322On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2323compressed using zlib.
2324
2325@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2326sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2327DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2328instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2329also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2330sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2331
2332The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2333@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2334
2335Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2336sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2337for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2338uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2339
2340The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2341involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2342default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2343@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2344
35835446
JR
2345@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2346@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2347This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2348linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2349for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2350about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2351
4f9c04f7 2352Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23531021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2354run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2355has been used.
2356
2357The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2358enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2359
c0065db7
RM
2360@kindex --build-id
2361@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2362@item --build-id
2363@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2364Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2365or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2366unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2367@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2368@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2369@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2370the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2371string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2372@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2373is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2374
2375The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2376that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2377unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2378to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2379file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2380string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2381
2382Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2383@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2384@end table
2385
0285c67d
NC
2386@c man end
2387
36f63dca 2388@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2389
0285c67d
NC
2390@c man begin OPTIONS
2391
ff5dcc92 2392The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2393the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2394normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2395use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2396@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2397like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2398symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2399object file).
2400
2401In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2402support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2403PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2404values by either a space or an equals sign.
2405
ff5dcc92 2406@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2407
2408@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2409@item --add-stdcall-alias
2410If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2411as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2412[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2413
2414@kindex --base-file
2415@item --base-file @var{file}
2416Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2417addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2418@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2419[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2420
2421@kindex --dll
2422@item --dll
2423Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2424@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2425file.
bb10df36 2426[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2427
88183869
DK
2428@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2429@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2430@item --enable-long-section-names
2431@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2432The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2433the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2434for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2435fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2436to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2437allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2438disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2439generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2440as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2441with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2442GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2443information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2444option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2445section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2446when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2447image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2448[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2449
252b5132
RH
2450@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2451@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2452@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2453@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2454If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2455do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2456only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2457resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2458undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2459@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2460to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2461warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2462import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2463to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2464feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2465@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2466mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2467[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2468
522f09cd
KT
2469@kindex --leading-underscore
2470@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2471@item --leading-underscore
2472@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2473For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2474in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2475disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2476
252b5132
RH
2477@cindex DLLs, creating
2478@kindex --export-all-symbols
2479@item --export-all-symbols
2480If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2481be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2482otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2483explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2484attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2485option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2486@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2487@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2488exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2489re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2490such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2491@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2492@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2493Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2494not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2495extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2496(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2497These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2498@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2499@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2500@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2501@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2502[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2503
2504@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2505@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2506Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2507exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2508[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2509
2927aaca
NC
2510@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2511@item --exclude-all-symbols
2512Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2513[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2514
252b5132
RH
2515@kindex --file-alignment
2516@item --file-alignment
2517Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2518file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2519512.
bb10df36 2520[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2521
2522@cindex heap size
2523@kindex --heap
2524@item --heap @var{reserve}
2525@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2526Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2527to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2528committed.
bb10df36 2529[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2530
2531@cindex image base
2532@kindex --image-base
2533@item --image-base @var{value}
2534Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2535the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2536is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2537your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2538other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2539for dlls.
bb10df36 2540[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2541
2542@kindex --kill-at
2543@item --kill-at
2544If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2545symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2546[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2547
26d2d8a2
BF
2548@kindex --large-address-aware
2549@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2550If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2551header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2552greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2553or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2554section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2555[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2556
f69a2f97
NC
2557@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2558@item --disable-large-address-aware
2559Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2560This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2561driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2562addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2563[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2564
252b5132
RH
2565@kindex --major-image-version
2566@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2567Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2568[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2569
2570@kindex --major-os-version
2571@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2572Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2574
2575@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2576@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2577Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2578[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2579
2580@kindex --minor-image-version
2581@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2582Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2584
2585@kindex --minor-os-version
2586@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2587Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2589
2590@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2591@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2592Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2594
2595@cindex DEF files, creating
2596@cindex DLLs, creating
2597@kindex --output-def
2598@item --output-def @var{file}
2599The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2600file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2601(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2602library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2603automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2605
b044cda1 2606@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2607@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2608@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2609@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2610Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2611@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2612By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2613for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2614execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2616
2617@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2618@item --disable-auto-image-base
2619Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2620user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2621default.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2623
2624@cindex DLLs, linking to
2625@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2626@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2627When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2628search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2629@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2630between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2631uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2632@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2633[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2634
2635@kindex --enable-auto-import
2636@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2637Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2638DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2639building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2640'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2641to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2642specification published by Microsoft.
2643
e2a83dd0
NC
2644Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2645data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2646placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2647around a problem with consts that is described here:
2648http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2649
4d8907ac
DS
2650Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2651see this message:
0d888aac 2652
ece2d90e 2653"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2654documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2655
ece2d90e
NC
2656This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2657ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2658allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2659fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2660constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2661multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2662this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2663of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2664the warning, and exit.
2665
2666There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2667data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2668
2fa9fc65
NC
2669One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2670of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2671this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2672
c0065db7
RM
2673A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2674that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2675there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2676a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2677
2678@example
2679extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2680extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2681 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2682@end example
2683
2684or
2685
2686@example
2687extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2688extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2689 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2690@end example
2691
c0065db7 2692For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2693is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2694
2695@example
2696extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2697extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2698 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2699@end example
2700
c406afaf
NC
2701or
2702
2703@example
2704extern long long extern_ll;
2705extern_ll -->
2706 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2707@end example
2708
2fa9fc65 2709A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2710'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2711@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2712requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2713building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2714merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2715between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2716constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2717
2718Original:
2719@example
2720--foo.h
2721extern int arr[];
2722--foo.c
2723#include "foo.h"
2724void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2725 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2726@}
2727@end example
2728
2729Solution 1:
2730@example
2731--foo.h
2732extern int arr[];
2733--foo.c
2734#include "foo.h"
2735void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2736 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2737 volatile int *parr = arr;
2738 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2739@}
2740@end example
2741
2742Solution 2:
2743@example
2744--foo.h
2745/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2746#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2747 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2748#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2749#else
2750#define FOO_IMPORT
2751#endif
2752extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2753--foo.c
2754#include "foo.h"
2755void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2756 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2757@}
2758@end example
2759
c0065db7 2760A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2761library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2762for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2763functions).
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2765
2766@kindex --disable-auto-import
2767@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2768Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2769@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2770[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2771
2fa9fc65
NC
2772@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2773@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2774If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2775that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2776a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2777environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2778[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2779
2780@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2781@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2782Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2783DLLs.
bb10df36 2784[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2785
b044cda1
CW
2786@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2787@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2788Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2789[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2790
252b5132
RH
2791@kindex --section-alignment
2792@item --section-alignment
2793Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2794addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2795[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2796
2797@cindex stack size
2798@kindex --stack
2799@item --stack @var{reserve}
2800@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2801Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2802to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2803committed.
bb10df36 2804[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2805
2806@kindex --subsystem
2807@item --subsystem @var{which}
2808@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2809@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2810Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2811legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2812@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2813the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2814@var{which}.
bb10df36 2815[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2816
2f563b51
DK
2817The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2818of the PE file header:
2819[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2820
2d5c3743
NC
2821@kindex --high-entropy-va
2822@item --high-entropy-va
2823Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2824(ASLR).
2825
2f563b51
DK
2826@kindex --dynamicbase
2827@item --dynamicbase
2828The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2829randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2830Vista for i386 PE targets.
2831
2832@kindex --forceinteg
2833@item --forceinteg
2834Code integrity checks are enforced.
2835
2836@kindex --nxcompat
2837@item --nxcompat
2838The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2839This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2840
2841@kindex --no-isolation
2842@item --no-isolation
2843Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2844
2845@kindex --no-seh
2846@item --no-seh
2847The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2848this image.
2849
2850@kindex --no-bind
2851@item --no-bind
2852Do not bind this image.
2853
2854@kindex --wdmdriver
2855@item --wdmdriver
2856The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2857
2f563b51
DK
2858@kindex --tsaware
2859@item --tsaware
2860The image is Terminal Server aware.
2861
0cb112f7
CF
2862@kindex --insert-timestamp
2863@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2864@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2865Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2866as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2867other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2868will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2869same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2870can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2871that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2872identically.
252b5132
RH
2873@end table
2874
0285c67d
NC
2875@c man end
2876
ac145307
BS
2877@ifset C6X
2878@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2879
2880@c man begin OPTIONS
2881
2882The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2883libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2884all executables use an index of 0.
2885
2886@table @gcctabopt
2887
2888@kindex --dsbt-size
2889@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2890This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2891or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2892entries.
2893
2894@kindex --dsbt-index
2895@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2896This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2897to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2898executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2899@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2900
fbd9ad90
PB
2901@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2902The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2903exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2904
ac145307
BS
2905@end table
2906
2907@c man end
2908@end ifset
2909
93fd0973
SC
2910@ifset M68HC11
2911@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2912
2913@c man begin OPTIONS
2914
2915The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2916memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2917
2918@table @gcctabopt
2919
2920@kindex --no-trampoline
2921@item --no-trampoline
2922This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2923is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2924instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2925
2926@kindex --bank-window
2927@item --bank-window @var{name}
2928This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2929the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2930The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2931paging and addresses within the memory window.
2932
2933@end table
2934
2935@c man end
2936@end ifset
2937
7fb9f789
NC
2938@ifset M68K
2939@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2940
2941@c man begin OPTIONS
2942
2943The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2944when linking for 68K targets.
2945
2946@table @gcctabopt
2947
2948@kindex --got
2949@item --got=@var{type}
2950This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2951@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2952@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2953Info entry for @file{ld}.
2954
2955@end table
2956
2957@c man end
2958@end ifset
2959
833794fc
MR
2960@ifset MIPS
2961@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2962
2963@c man begin OPTIONS
2964
2965The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2966generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2967
2968@table @gcctabopt
2969
2970@kindex --insn32
2971@item --insn32
2972@kindex --no-insn32
2973@itemx --no-insn32
2974These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2975generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2976or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
297732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2978used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2979possible.
2980
2981@end table
2982
2983@c man end
2984@end ifset
2985
252b5132
RH
2986@ifset UsesEnvVars
2987@node Environment
2988@section Environment Variables
2989
0285c67d
NC
2990@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2991
560e09e9 2992You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2993@ifclear SingleFormat
2994@code{GNUTARGET},
2995@end ifclear
2996@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2997
36f63dca 2998@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2999@kindex GNUTARGET
3000@cindex default input format
3001@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3002use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3003of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3004@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3005of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3006attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3007this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3008there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3009object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3010BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3011in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3012@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3013
3014@kindex LDEMULATION
3015@cindex default emulation
3016@cindex emulation, default
3017@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3018@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3019behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3020available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3021the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3022variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3023linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3024
3025@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3026@cindex demangling, default
3027Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3028@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3029default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3030a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3031may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3032options.
3033
0285c67d
NC
3034@c man end
3035@end ifset
3036
252b5132
RH
3037@node Scripts
3038@chapter Linker Scripts
3039
3040@cindex scripts
3041@cindex linker scripts
3042@cindex command files
3043Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3044written in the linker command language.
3045
3046The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3047the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3048the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3049more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3050direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3051described below.
3052
3053The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3054yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3055linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3056to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3057such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3058
3059You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3060line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3061default linker script.
3062
3063You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3064to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3065Linker Scripts}.
3066
3067@menu
3068* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3069* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3070* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3071* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3072* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3073* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3074* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3075* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3076* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3077* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3078* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3079@end menu
3080
3081@node Basic Script Concepts
3082@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3083@cindex linker script concepts
3084We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3085describe the linker script language.
3086
3087The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3088file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3089@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3090The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3091purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3092among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3093section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3094in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3095
3096Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3097also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3098contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3099the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3100A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3101area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3102loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3103which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3104of debugging information.
3105
3106Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3107first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3108the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3109@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3110section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3111same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3112is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3113(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3114based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3115RAM address would be the VMA.
3116
3117You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3118program with the @samp{-h} option.
3119
3120Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3121@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3122has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3123information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3124will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3125static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3126referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3127
3128You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3129program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3130option.
3131
3132@node Script Format
3133@section Linker Script Format
3134@cindex linker script format
3135Linker scripts are text files.
3136
3137You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3138either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3139symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3140generally ignored.
3141
3142Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3143If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3144otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3145double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3146file name.
3147
3148You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3149@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3150to whitespace.
3151
3152@node Simple Example
3153@section Simple Linker Script Example
3154@cindex linker script example
3155@cindex example of linker script
3156Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3157
3158The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3159@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3160memory layout of the output file.
3161
3162The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3163describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3164code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3165@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3166Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3167your input files.
3168
3169For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31700x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3171linker script which will do that:
3172@smallexample
3173SECTIONS
3174@{
3175 . = 0x10000;
3176 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3177 . = 0x8000000;
3178 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3179 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3180@}
3181@end smallexample
3182
3183You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3184followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3185descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3186
252b5132
RH
3187The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3188sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3189counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3190other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3191current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3192incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3193@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3194
3195The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3196required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3197after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3198which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3199wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3200means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3201
3202Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3203@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3204@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3205
3206The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3207the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3208at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3209output section, the value of the location counter will be
3210@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3211effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3212immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3213
3214The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3215alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3216example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3217sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3218may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3219sections.
3220
3221That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3222
3223@node Simple Commands
3224@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3225@cindex linker script simple commands
3226In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3227
3228@menu
3229* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3230* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3231@ifclear SingleFormat
3232* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3233@end ifclear
3234
4a93e180 3235* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3236* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3237@end menu
3238
3239@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3240@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3241@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3242@cindex start of execution
3243@cindex first instruction
3244@cindex entry point
3245The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3246point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3247entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3248@smallexample
3249ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3250@end smallexample
3251
3252There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3253entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3254stopping when one of them succeeds:
3255@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3256@item
252b5132 3257the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3258@item
252b5132 3259the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3260@item
3ab904c4
NC
3261the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3262targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3263check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3264@item
252b5132 3265the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3266@item
252b5132
RH
3267The address @code{0}.
3268@end itemize
3269
3270@node File Commands
36f63dca 3271@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3272@cindex linker script file commands
3273Several linker script commands deal with files.
3274
3275@table @code
3276@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3277@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3278@cindex including a linker script
3279Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3280be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3281with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
328210 levels deep.
3283
4006703d
NS
3284You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3285@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3286
252b5132
RH
3287@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3288@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3289@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3290@cindex input files in linker scripts
3291@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3292@cindex linker script input object files
3293The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3294in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3295
3296For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3297a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3298then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3299
3300In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3301script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3302
e3f2db7f
AO
3303In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3304with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3305located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3306for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3307open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3308linker will search through the archive library search path.
3309The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3310as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3311description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3312
ff5dcc92 3313If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3314name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3315@samp{-l}.
3316
3317When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3318files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3319script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3320
3321@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3322@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3323@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3324@cindex grouping input files
3325The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3326files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3327new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3328in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3329
b717d30e
JJ
3330@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3331@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3332@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3333This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3334commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3335as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3336with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3337when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3338@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3339and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3340setting afterwards.
3341
252b5132
RH
3342@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3343@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3344@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3345The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3346@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3347@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3348Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3349precedence.
3350
3351You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3352output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3353
3354@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3355@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3356@cindex library search path in linker script
3357@cindex archive search path in linker script
3358@cindex search path in linker script
3359The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3360@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3361@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3362on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3363are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3364the command line option are searched first.
3365
3366@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3367@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3368@cindex first input file
3369The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3370that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3371though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3372when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3373first file.
3374@end table
3375
3376@ifclear SingleFormat
3377@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3378@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3379A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3380
3381@table @code
3382@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3383@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3384@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3385@cindex output file format in linker script
3386The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3387output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3388exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3389(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3390line option takes precedence.
3391
3392You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3393formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3394This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3395desired endianness.
3396
3397If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3398will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3399output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3400used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3401
3402For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3403command:
3404@smallexample
3405OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3406@end smallexample
3407This says that the default format for the output file is
3408@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3409option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3410format.
3411
3412@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3413@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3414@cindex input file format in linker script
3415The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3416files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3417This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3418(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3419is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3420command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3421@end table
3422@end ifclear
3423
4a93e180
NC
3424@node REGION_ALIAS
3425@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3426@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3427@cindex region alias
3428@cindex region names
3429
3430Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3431@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3432
3433@smallexample
3434REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3435@end smallexample
3436
3437The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3438memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3439to memory regions. An example follows.
3440
3441Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3442memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3443that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3444non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3445access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3446read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3447sections:
3448
3449@itemize @bullet
3450@item
3451@code{.text} program code;
3452@item
3453@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3454@item
3455@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3456@item
3457@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3458@end itemize
3459
3460The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3461part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3462output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3463systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3464@code{C}:
3465@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3466@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3467@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3468@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3469@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3470@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3471@end multitable
3472The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3473loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3474the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3475the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3476
3477The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3478includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3479memory layout:
3480@smallexample
3481INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3482
3483SECTIONS
3484 @{
3485 .text :
3486 @{
3487 *(.text)
3488 @} > REGION_TEXT
3489 .rodata :
3490 @{
3491 *(.rodata)
3492 rodata_end = .;
3493 @} > REGION_RODATA
3494 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3495 @{
3496 data_start = .;
3497 *(.data)
3498 @} > REGION_DATA
3499 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3500 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3501 .bss :
3502 @{
3503 *(.bss)
3504 @} > REGION_BSS
3505 @}
3506@end smallexample
3507
3508Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3509regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3510variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3511@table @code
3512@item A
3513Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3514@smallexample
3515MEMORY
3516 @{
3517 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3518 @}
3519
3520REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3521REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3522REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3523REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3524@end smallexample
3525@item B
3526Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3527into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3528@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3529@smallexample
3530MEMORY
3531 @{
3532 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3533 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3534 @}
3535
3536REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3537REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3538REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3539REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3540@end smallexample
3541@item C
3542Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3543@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3544initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3545system start into the @code{RAM}.
3546@smallexample
3547MEMORY
3548 @{
3549 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3550 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3551 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3552 @}
3553
3554REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3555REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3556REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3557REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3558@end smallexample
3559@end table
3560
3561It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3562@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3563necessary:
3564@smallexample
3565#include <string.h>
3566
3567extern char data_start [];
3568extern char data_size [];
3569extern char data_load_start [];
3570
3571void copy_data(void)
3572@{
3573 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3574 @{
3575 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3576 @}
3577@}
3578@end smallexample
3579
252b5132 3580@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3581@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3582There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3583
3584@table @code
3585@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3586@kindex ASSERT
3587@cindex assertion in linker script
3588Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3589with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3590
fd1c4238
NC
3591Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3592take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3593inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3594for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3595symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3596
3597@smallexample
3598 .stack :
3599 @{
3600 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3601 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3602 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3603 @}
3604@end smallexample
3605
3606will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3607PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3608can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3609
3610@smallexample
3611 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3612 .stack :
3613 @{
3614 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3615 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3616 @}
3617@end smallexample
3618
3619will work.
3620
252b5132
RH
3621@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3622@kindex EXTERN
3623@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3624Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3625symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3626modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3627each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3628command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3629
3630@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3631@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3632@cindex common allocation in linker script
3633This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3634to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3635output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3636
4818e05f
AM
3637@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3638@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3639@cindex common allocation in linker script
3640This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3641command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3642to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3643
53d25da6
AM
3644@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3645@kindex INSERT
3646@cindex insert user script into default script
3647This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3648augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3649inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3650@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3651default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3652sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3653linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3654insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3655linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3656default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3657of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3658to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3659is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3660
3661@smallexample
3662SECTIONS
3663@{
3664 OVERLAY :
3665 @{
3666 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3667 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3668 @}
3669@}
3670INSERT AFTER .text;
3671@end smallexample
3672
252b5132
RH
3673@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3674@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3675@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3676This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3677references among certain output sections.
3678
3679In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3680using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3681will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3682errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3683a function defined in the other section.
3684
3685The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3686@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3687an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3688@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3689names.
3690
cdf96953
MF
3691@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3692@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3693@cindex cross references
3694This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3695references to one section from a list of other sections.
3696
3697The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3698output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3699a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3700there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3701must never call back.
3702
3703The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3704The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3705If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3706the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3707status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3708names, not input section names.
3709
252b5132
RH
3710@ifclear SingleFormat
3711@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3712@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3713@cindex machine architecture
3714@cindex architecture
3715Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3716of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3717architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3718the @samp{-f} option.
3719@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3720
3721@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3722@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3723This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3724@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3725in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3726@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3727@end table
3728
3729@node Assignments
3730@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3731@cindex assignment in scripts
3732@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3733@cindex variables, defining
3734You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3735the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3736
3737@menu
3738* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3739* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3740* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3741* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3742* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3743@end menu
3744
3745@node Simple Assignments
3746@subsection Simple Assignments
3747
3748You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3749
3750@table @code
3751@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3752@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3753@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3754@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3755@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3756@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3757@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3758@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3759@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3760@end table
3761
3762The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3763@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3764defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3765
3766The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3767may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3768
3769The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3770
3771Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3772
3773You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3774statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3775section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3776
3777The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3778expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3779
3780Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3781assignments may be used:
3782
3783@smallexample
3784floating_point = 0;
3785SECTIONS
3786@{
3787 .text :
3788 @{
3789 *(.text)
3790 _etext = .;
3791 @}
156e34dd 3792 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3793 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3794@}
3795@end smallexample
3796@noindent
3797In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3798zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3799the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3800defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3801upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3802
eb8476a6
MR
3803@node HIDDEN
3804@subsection HIDDEN
3805@cindex HIDDEN
3806For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3807exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3808
3809Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3810@code{HIDDEN}:
3811
3812@smallexample
3813HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3814SECTIONS
3815@{
3816 .text :
3817 @{
3818 *(.text)
3819 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3820 @}
3821 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3822 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3823@}
3824@end smallexample
3825@noindent
3826In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3827
252b5132
RH
3828@node PROVIDE
3829@subsection PROVIDE
3830@cindex PROVIDE
3831In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3832only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3833the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3834@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3835@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3836@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3837@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3838@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3839
3840Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3841@smallexample
3842SECTIONS
3843@{
3844 .text :
3845 @{
3846 *(.text)
3847 _etext = .;
3848 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3849 @}
3850@}
3851@end smallexample
3852
3853In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3854underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3855the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3856underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3857If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3858linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3859
7af8e998
L
3860@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3861@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3862@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3863Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3864hidden and won't be exported.
3865
73ae6183
NC
3866@node Source Code Reference
3867@subsection Source Code Reference
3868
3869Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3870intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3871a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3872symbol that does not have a value.
3873
3874Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3875transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3876stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3877prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3878mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3879of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3880variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3881linker script variable might be referred to as:
3882
3883@smallexample
3884 extern int foo;
3885@end smallexample
3886
3887But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3888
3889@smallexample
3890 _foo = 1000;
3891@end smallexample
3892
3893In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3894transformation has taken place.
3895
3896When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3897things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3898in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3899second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3900table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3901contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3902value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3903
3904@smallexample
3905 int foo = 1000;
3906@end smallexample
3907
10bf6894 3908creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3909holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3910number 1000 is initially stored.
3911
3912When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3913first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3914memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3915So:
3916
3917@smallexample
3918 foo = 1;
3919@end smallexample
3920
3921looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3922associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3923address. Whereas:
3924
3925@smallexample
3926 int * a = & foo;
3927@end smallexample
3928
10bf6894 3929looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3930and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3931the variable @samp{a}.
3932
3933Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3934the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3935an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3936
3937@smallexample
3938 foo = 1000;
3939@end smallexample
3940
3941creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3942the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3943address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3944linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3945access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3946
3947Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3948you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3949use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3950section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3951linker script contains these declarations:
3952
3953@smallexample
3954@group
3955 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3956 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3957 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3958@end group
3959@end smallexample
3960
3961Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3962
3963@smallexample
3964@group
3965 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3966
73ae6183
NC
3967 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3968@end group
3969@end smallexample
3970
3971Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3972Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3973arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3974
3975@smallexample
3976@group
3977 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3978
3979 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3980@end group
3981@end smallexample
3982
3983Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3984operators.
73ae6183 3985
252b5132 3986@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3987@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3988@kindex SECTIONS
3989The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3990into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3991
3992The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3993@smallexample
3994SECTIONS
3995@{
3996 @var{sections-command}
3997 @var{sections-command}
3998 @dots{}
3999@}
4000@end smallexample
4001
4002Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4003
4004@itemize @bullet
4005@item
4006an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4007@item
4008a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4009@item
4010an output section description
4011@item
4012an overlay description
4013@end itemize
4014
4015The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4016@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4017those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4018understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4019the layout of the output file.
4020
4021Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4022below.
4023
4024If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4025linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4026section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4027input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4028example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4029in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4030
4031@menu
4032* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4033* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4034* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4035* Input Section:: Input section description
4036* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4037* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4038* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4039* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4040* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4041@end menu
4042
4043@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4044@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4045The full description of an output section looks like this:
4046@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4047@group
7e7d5768 4048@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4049 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4050 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4051 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4052 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4053 @{
4054 @var{output-section-command}
4055 @var{output-section-command}
4056 @dots{}
abc9061b 4057 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4058@end group
4059@end smallexample
4060
4061Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4062
4063The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4064name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4065The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4066the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4067The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4068
4069Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4070
4071@itemize @bullet
4072@item
4073a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4074@item
4075an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4076@item
4077data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4078@item
4079a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4080@end itemize
4081
4082@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4083@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4084@cindex name, section
4085@cindex section name
4086The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4087meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4088support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4089must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4090example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4091output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4092names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4093quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4094characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4095commas must be quoted.
4096
4097The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4098Discarding}.
4099
4100@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4101@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4102@cindex address, section
4103@cindex section address
4104The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4105address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4106is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4107
4108If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4109section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4110to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4111alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4112contained within the output section.
4113
4114The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4115
4116@itemize @bullet
4117@item
4118If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4119is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4120in that region.
4121
4122@item
4123If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4124regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4125section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4126be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4127
4128@item
4129If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4130the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4131counter.
4132@end itemize
4133
4134@noindent
4135For example:
4136
252b5132
RH
4137@smallexample
4138.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4139@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4140
252b5132
RH
4141@noindent
4142and
ea5cae92 4143
252b5132
RH
4144@smallexample
4145.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4146@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4147
252b5132
RH
4148@noindent
4149are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4150@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4151counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4152counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4153input sections.
252b5132
RH
4154
4155The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4156For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4157so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4158do something like this:
4159@smallexample
4160.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4161@end smallexample
4162@noindent
4163This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4164aligned upward to the specified value.
4165
4166Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4167location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4168sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4169
4170@node Input Section
36f63dca 4171@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4172@cindex input sections
4173@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4174The most common output section command is an input section description.
4175
4176The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4177You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4178in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4179map the input files into your memory layout.
4180
4181@menu
4182* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4183* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4184* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4185* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4186* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4187@end menu
4188
4189@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4190@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4191@cindex input section basics
4192An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4193by a list of section names in parentheses.
4194
4195The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4196describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4197
4198The most common input section description is to include all input
4199sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4200include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4201@smallexample
4202*(.text)
4203@end smallexample
4204@noindent
18625d54 4205Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4206@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4207of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4208match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4209example:
252b5132 4210@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4211EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4212@end smallexample
4213@noindent
4214will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4215and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4216placed inside the section list, for example:
4217@smallexample
b4346c09 4218*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4219@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4220@noindent
4221The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4222two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4223more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4224
4225There are two ways to include more than one section:
4226@smallexample
4227*(.text .rdata)
4228*(.text) *(.rdata)
4229@end smallexample
4230@noindent
4231The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4232@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4233first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4234they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4235@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4236@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4237
8f1732fc
AB
4238When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4239is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4240immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4241@smallexample
4242*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4243@end smallexample
4244@noindent
4245will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4246@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4247from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4248exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4249could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4250@smallexample
4251*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4252@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4253@noindent
4254Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4255before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4256all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4257@smallexample
4258EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4259@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4260
252b5132
RH
4261You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4262You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4263needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4264@smallexample
4265data.o(.data)
4266@end smallexample
4267
ae17ab41
CM
4268To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4269of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4270
4271Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4272
4273@smallexample
4274@group
4275SECTIONS @{
4276 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4277 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4278@}
4279@end group
4280@end smallexample
4281
4282In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4283input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4284@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4285@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4286whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4287
967928e9
AM
4288You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4289matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4290with no whitespace around the colon.
4291
4292@table @samp
4293@item archive:file
4294matches file within archive
4295@item archive:
4296matches the whole archive
4297@item :file
4298matches file but not one in an archive
4299@end table
4300
4301Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4302wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4303single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4304@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4305within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4306also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4307other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4308from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4309command.
4310
252b5132
RH
4311If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4312the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4313commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4314@smallexample
4315data.o
4316@end smallexample
4317
967928e9
AM
4318When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4319and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4320characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4321name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4322did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4323though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4324@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4325the archive search path.
4326
4327@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4328@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4329@cindex input section wildcards
4330@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4331@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4332@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4333In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4334name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4335
4336The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4337pattern for the file name.
4338
4339The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4340
4341@table @samp
4342@item *
4343matches any number of characters
4344@item ?
4345matches any single character
4346@item [@var{chars}]
4347matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4348character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4349@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4350@item \
4351quotes the following character
4352@end table
4353
4354When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4355will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4356Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4357exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4358@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4359a @samp{/} character.
4360
4361File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4362specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4363does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4364
4365If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4366appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4367will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4368sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4369@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4370@smallexample
4371.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4372.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4373@end smallexample
4374
bcaa7b3e 4375@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4376Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4377in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4378this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4379pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4380@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4381into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4382
bcaa7b3e
L
4383@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4384@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4385difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4386descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4387Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4388reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4389
02ecc8e9
L
4390@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4391@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4392difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4393ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4394encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4395
bcaa7b3e
L
4396@cindex SORT
4397@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4398
4399When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4400can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4401
4402@enumerate
4403@item
4404@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4405It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4406sections have the same name.
4407@item
4408@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4409It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4410sections have the same alignment.
4411@item
c0065db7 4412@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4413treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4414@item
4415@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4416is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4417@item
4418All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4419@end enumerate
4420
4421When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4422section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4423takes precedence over the command line option.
4424
4425If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4426command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4427treated as nested sorting command.
4428
4429@enumerate
4430@item
4431@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4432@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4433@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4434@item
4435@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4436@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4437@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4438@end enumerate
4439
4440If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4441command line option will be ignored.
4442
eda680f8
L
4443@cindex SORT_NONE
4444@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4445section sorting option.
4446
252b5132
RH
4447If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4448@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4449precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4450
4451This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4452files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4453sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4454The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4455with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4456linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4457@smallexample
4458@group
4459SECTIONS @{
4460 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4461 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4462 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4463 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4464@}
4465@end group
4466@end smallexample
4467
4468@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4469@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4470@cindex common symbol placement
4471@cindex uninitialized data placement
4472A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4473file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4474linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4475named @samp{COMMON}.
4476
4477You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4478other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4479particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4480input files are placed in another section.
4481
4482In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4483@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4484@smallexample
4485.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4486@end smallexample
4487
4488@cindex scommon section
4489@cindex small common symbols
4490Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4491example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4492symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4493different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4494the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4495symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4496to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4497locations.
4498
4499@cindex [COMMON]
4500You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4501notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4502@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4503
4504@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4505@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4506@cindex KEEP
4507@cindex garbage collection
4508When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4509it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4510This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4511with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4512@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4513
4514@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4515@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4516The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4517to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4518start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4519@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4520follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4521@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4522@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4523All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4524files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4525
4526@smallexample
4527@group
4528SECTIONS @{
4529 outputa 0x10000 :
4530 @{
4531 all.o
4532 foo.o (.input1)
4533 @}
36f63dca
NC
4534@end group
4535@group
252b5132
RH
4536 outputb :
4537 @{
4538 foo.o (.input2)
4539 foo1.o (.input1)
4540 @}
36f63dca
NC
4541@end group
4542@group
252b5132
RH
4543 outputc :
4544 @{
4545 *(.input1)
4546 *(.input2)
4547 @}
4548@}
4549@end group
a1ab1d2a 4550@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4551
4552@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4553@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4554@cindex data
4555@cindex section data
4556@cindex output section data
4557@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4558@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4559@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4560@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4561@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4562You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4563@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4564an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4565parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4566value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4567counter.
4568
4569The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4570store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4571bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4572stored.
4573
4574For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4575of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4576@smallexample
4577BYTE(1)
4578LONG(addr)
4579@end smallexample
4580
4581When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4582same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4583target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4584@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4585@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4586
4587If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4588which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4589When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4590true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4591endianness of the first input object file.
4592
36f63dca 4593Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4594between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4595@smallexample
4596SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4597@end smallexample
4598whereas this will work:
4599@smallexample
4600SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4601@end smallexample
4602
252b5132
RH
4603@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4604@cindex holes, filling
4605@cindex unspecified memory
4606You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4607current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4608otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4609gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4610with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4611necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4612point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4613than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4614different parts of an output section.
4615
4616This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4617value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4618@smallexample
563e308f 4619FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4620@end smallexample
4621
4622The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4623section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4624part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4625entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4626precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4627expression.
252b5132
RH
4628
4629@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4630@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4631There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4632commands.
4633
4634@table @code
4635@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4636@cindex input filename symbols
4637@cindex filename symbols
4638@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4639The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4640The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4641file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4642the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4643
4644This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4645normally used for any other object file format.
4646
4647@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4648@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4649@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4650@item CONSTRUCTORS
4651When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4652unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4653destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4654arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4655automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4656For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4657linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4658@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4659ignored for other object file formats.
4660
4661The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4662constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4663Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4664the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4665first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4666of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4667compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4668formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4669@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4670the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4671destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4672@code{exit}.
4673
4674For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4675arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4676addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4677and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4678linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4679runtime code expects to see.
4680
4681@smallexample
4682 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4683 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4684 *(.ctors)
4685 LONG(0)
4686 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4687 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4688 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4689 *(.dtors)
4690 LONG(0)
4691 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4692@end smallexample
4693
4694If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4695which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4696are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4697are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4698command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4699@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4700@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4701@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4702
4703Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4704and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4705need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4706scripts.
4707
4708@end table
4709
4710@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4711@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4712@cindex discarding sections
4713@cindex sections, discarding
4714@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4715The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4716This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4717may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4718@smallexample
49c13adb 4719.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4720@end smallexample
4721@noindent
4722will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4723@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4724sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4725space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4726too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4727space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4728@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4729@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4730This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4731
a0976ea4 4732The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4733on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4734symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4735the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4736section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4737
4738@cindex /DISCARD/
4739The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4740input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4741section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4742
4743@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4744@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4745@cindex output section attributes
4746We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4747like this:
0c71d759 4748
252b5132 4749@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4750@group
7e7d5768 4751@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4752 [AT(@var{lma})]
4753 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4754 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4755 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4756 @{
4757 @var{output-section-command}
4758 @var{output-section-command}
4759 @dots{}
562d3460 4760 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4761@end group
4762@end smallexample
0c71d759 4763
252b5132
RH
4764We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4765@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4766remaining section attributes.
4767
a1ab1d2a 4768@menu
252b5132
RH
4769* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4770* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4771* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4772* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4773* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4774* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4775* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4776* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4777@end menu
4778
4779@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4780@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4781Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4782parentheses. The following types are defined:
4783
4784@table @code
4785@item NOLOAD
4786The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4787loaded into memory when the program is run.
4788@item DSECT
4789@itemx COPY
4790@itemx INFO
4791@itemx OVERLAY
4792These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4793rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4794marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4795section when the program is run.
4796@end table
4797
4798@kindex NOLOAD
4799@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4800@cindex loading, preventing
4801The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4802the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4803the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4804@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4805need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4806@smallexample
4807@group
4808SECTIONS @{
4809 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4810 @dots{}
4811@}
4812@end group
4813@end smallexample
4814
4815@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4816@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4817@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4818@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4819@cindex load address
4820@cindex section load address
4821Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4822@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4823@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4824specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4825address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4826
ea5cae92
NC
4827The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4828specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4829takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4830load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4831region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4832
4833If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4834section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4835load address:
4836
4837@itemize @bullet
4838@item
4839If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4840the LMA address as well.
4841
4842@item
4843If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4844
4845@item
4846Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4847with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4848section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4849VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4850the last section in the located region.
4851
4852@item
4853If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4854that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4855
4856@item
4857If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4858section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4859@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4860
4861@cindex ROM initialized data
4862@cindex initialized data in ROM
4863This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4864example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4865called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4866@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4867even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4868uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4869defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4870counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4871
4872@smallexample
4873@group
4874SECTIONS
4875 @{
4876 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4877 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4878 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4879 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4880 .bss 0x3000 :
4881 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4882@}
4883@end group
4884@end smallexample
4885
4886The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4887this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4888the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4889how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4890script.
4891
4892@smallexample
4893@group
4894extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4895char *src = &_etext;
4896char *dst = &_data;
4897
ea5cae92
NC
4898/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4899while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4900 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4901
ea5cae92 4902/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4903for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4904 *dst = 0;
4905@end group
4906@end smallexample
4907
bbf115d3
L
4908@node Forced Output Alignment
4909@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4910@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4911@cindex forcing output section alignment
4912@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4913You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4914alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4915intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4916
7e7d5768
AM
4917@node Forced Input Alignment
4918@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4919@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4920@cindex forcing input section alignment
4921@cindex input section alignment
4922You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4923SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4924sections, whether larger or smaller.
4925
0c71d759
NC
4926@node Output Section Constraint
4927@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4928@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4929@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4930@cindex constraints on output sections
4931You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4932of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4933read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4934@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4935
252b5132 4936@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4937@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4938@kindex >@var{region}
4939@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4940@cindex memory regions and sections
4941You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4942using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4943
4944Here is a simple example:
4945@smallexample
4946@group
4947MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4948SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4949@end group
4950@end smallexample
4951
4952@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4953@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4954@kindex :@var{phdr}
4955@cindex section, assigning to program header
4956@cindex program headers and sections
4957You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4958using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4959one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4960assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4961@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4962linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4963
4964Here is a simple example:
4965@smallexample
4966@group
4967PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4968SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4969@end group
4970@end smallexample
4971
4972@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4973@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4974@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4975@cindex section fill pattern
4976@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4977You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4978@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4979(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4980within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4981alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4982necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4983of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4984an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4985fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4986other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4987pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4988expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4989
4990You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4991output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4992
4993Here is a simple example:
4994@smallexample
4995@group
563e308f 4996SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4997@end group
4998@end smallexample
4999
5000@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5001@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5002@kindex OVERLAY
5003@cindex overlays
5004An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5005are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5006the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5007copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5008required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5009can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5010than another.
5011
5012Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5013@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5014output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5015command is as follows:
5016@smallexample
5017@group
5018OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5019 @{
5020 @var{secname1}
5021 @{
5022 @var{output-section-command}
5023 @var{output-section-command}
5024 @dots{}
5025 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5026 @var{secname2}
5027 @{
5028 @var{output-section-command}
5029 @var{output-section-command}
5030 @dots{}
5031 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5032 @dots{}
abc9061b 5033 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5034@end group
5035@end smallexample
5036
5037Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5038section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5039section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5040those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5041except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5042sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5043
abc9061b
CC
5044The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5045the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5046
252b5132
RH
5047The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5048addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5049memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5050whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5051and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5052and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5053
56dd11f0
NC
5054If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5055references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5056the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5057sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5058@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5059
5060For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5061provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5062defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5063@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5064the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5065within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5066symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5067
5068At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5069the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5070
5071Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5072@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5073@smallexample
5074@group
5075 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5076 @{
5077 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5078 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5079 @}
5080@end group
5081@end smallexample
5082@noindent
5083This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5084address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5085@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5086following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5087@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5088@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5089
5090C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5091like the following.
5092
5093@smallexample
5094@group
5095 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5096 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5097 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5098@end group
5099@end smallexample
5100
5101Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5102everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5103example could have been written identically as follows.
5104
5105@smallexample
5106@group
5107 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5108 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5109 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5110 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5111 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5112 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5113 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5114@end group
5115@end smallexample
5116
5117@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5118@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5119@kindex MEMORY
5120@cindex memory regions
5121@cindex regions of memory
5122@cindex allocating memory
5123@cindex discontinuous memory
5124The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5125memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5126
5127The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5128memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5129may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5130can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5131set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5132regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5133around to fit into the available regions.
5134
127fcdff
AB
5135A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5136however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5137specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5138@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5139@smallexample
5140@group
a1ab1d2a 5141MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5142 @{
5143 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5144 @dots{}
5145 @}
5146@end group
5147@end smallexample
5148
5149The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5150region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5151Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5152with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5153must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5154add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5155command.
252b5132
RH
5156
5157@cindex memory region attributes
5158The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5159whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5160not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5161@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5162section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5163the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5164them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5165
5166The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5167@table @samp
5168@item R
5169Read-only section
5170@item W
5171Read/write section
5172@item X
5173Executable section
5174@item A
5175Allocatable section
5176@item I
5177Initialized section
5178@item L
5179Same as @samp{I}
5180@item !
c09e9a8c 5181Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5182@end table
5183
5184If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5185@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5186attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5187in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5188attributes.
5189
5190@kindex ORIGIN =
5191@kindex o =
5192@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5193The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5194the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5195cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5196abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5197@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5198
5199@kindex LENGTH =
5200@kindex len =
5201@kindex l =
5202The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5203region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5204be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5205@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5206
5207In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5208available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5209and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5210linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5211is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5212or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5213explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5214region.
5215
5216@smallexample
5217@group
a1ab1d2a 5218MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5219 @{
5220 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5221 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5222 @}
5223@end group
5224@end smallexample
5225
5226Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5227specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5228@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5229a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5230output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5231was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5232the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5233output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5234region, the linker will issue an error message.
5235
3ec57632 5236It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5237expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5238@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5239
5240@smallexample
5241@group
c0065db7 5242 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5243@end group
5244@end smallexample
5245
252b5132
RH
5246@node PHDRS
5247@section PHDRS Command
5248@kindex PHDRS
5249@cindex program headers
5250@cindex ELF program headers
5251@cindex program segments
5252@cindex segments, ELF
5253The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5254@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5255loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5256program with the @samp{-p} option.
5257
5258When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5259reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5260program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5261This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5262interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5263
5264The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5265in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5266precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5267the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5268not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5269
5270The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5271generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5272ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5273
5274This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5275@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5276
5277@smallexample
5278@group
5279PHDRS
5280@{
5281 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5282 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5283@}
5284@end group
5285@end smallexample
5286
5287The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5288of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5289header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5290with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5291must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5292is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5293
5294Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5295system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5296specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5297sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5298attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5299Section Phdr}.
5300
5301It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5302merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5303repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5304contain the section.
5305
5306If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5307then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5308not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5309convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5310placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5311default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5312segment at all.
5313
5314@kindex FILEHDR
5315@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5316You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5317the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5318The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5319file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5320include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5321segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5322these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5323
5324The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5325value of the keyword.
5326
5327@table @asis
5328@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5329Indicates an unused program header.
5330
5331@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5332Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5333the file.
5334
5335@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5336Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5337
5338@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5339Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5340found.
5341
5342@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5343Indicates a segment holding note information.
5344
5345@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5346A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5347ABI.
5348
5349@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5350Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5351
5352@item @var{expression}
5353An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5354be used for types not defined above.
5355@end table
5356
5357You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5358in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5359@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5360Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5361output section attribute.
5362
5363The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5364which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5365explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5366an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5367header.
5368
5369Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5370headers used on a native ELF system.
5371
5372@example
5373@group
5374PHDRS
5375@{
5376 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5377 interp PT_INTERP ;
5378 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5379 data PT_LOAD ;
5380 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5381@}
5382
5383SECTIONS
5384@{
5385 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5386 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5387 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5388 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5389 @dots{}
5390 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5391 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5392 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5393 @dots{}
5394@}
5395@end group
5396@end example
5397
5398@node VERSION
5399@section VERSION Command
5400@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5401@cindex symbol versions
5402@cindex version script
5403@cindex versions of symbols
5404The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5405only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5406symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5407a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5408shared library.
5409
5410You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5411you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5412also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5413
5414The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5415@smallexample
5416VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5417@end smallexample
5418
5419The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5420Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5421version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5422version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5423version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5424scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5425library.
5426
5427The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5428examples.
5429
5430@smallexample
5431VERS_1.1 @{
5432 global:
5433 foo1;
5434 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5435 old*;
5436 original*;
5437 new*;
252b5132
RH
5438@};
5439
5440VERS_1.2 @{
5441 foo2;
5442@} VERS_1.1;
5443
5444VERS_2.0 @{
5445 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5446 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5447 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5448 "f(int, double)";
5449 @};
252b5132
RH
5450@} VERS_1.2;
5451@end smallexample
5452
5453This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5454version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5455The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5456a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5457of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5458symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5459is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5460in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5461However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5462name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5463
5464Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5465depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5466to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5467
5468Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5469depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5470and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5471
5472When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5473specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5474unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5475unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5476somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5477wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5478wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5479set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5480ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5481
5482The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5483they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5484could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5485However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5486
0f6bf451 5487Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5488in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5489symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5490won't.
5491
5492@smallexample
7c9c73be 5493@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5494@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5495
252b5132
RH
5496When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5497symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5498requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5499shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5500loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5501linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5502application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5503way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5504all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5505search for each symbol reference.
5506
5507The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5508doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5509that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5510functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5511the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5512required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5513that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5514versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5515the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5516
5517There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5518first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5519source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5520script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5521maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5522@smallexample
5523__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5524@end smallexample
5525@noindent
5526in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5527be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5528The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5529@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5530takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5531
5532The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5533function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5534an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5535version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5536linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5537
5538To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5539source file. Here is an example:
5540
5541@smallexample
5542__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5543__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5544__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5545__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5546@end smallexample
5547
5548In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5549unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5550example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5551@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5552
5553When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5554some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5555this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5556@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5557declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5558you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5559
5560If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5561within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5562(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5563specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5564
cb840a31
L
5565You can also specify the language in the version script:
5566
5567@smallexample
5568VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5569@end smallexample
5570
c0065db7 5571The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5572The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5573demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5574patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5575@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5576
86043bbb
MM
5577Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5578described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5579or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5580the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5581whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5582cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5583might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5584should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5585expect when you upgrade.
5586
252b5132
RH
5587@node Expressions
5588@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5589@cindex expressions
5590@cindex arithmetic
5591The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5592that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5593expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5594host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5595
5596You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5597
5598The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5599expressions.
5600
5601@menu
5602* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5603* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5604* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5605* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5606* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5607* Operators:: Operators
5608* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5609* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5610* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5611@end menu
5612
5613@node Constants
5614@subsection Constants
5615@cindex integer notation
5616@cindex constants in linker scripts
5617All constants are integers.
5618
5619As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5620octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5621hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5622@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5623@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5624value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5625
5626@cindex scaled integers
5627@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5628@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5629@cindex suffixes for integers
5630@cindex integer suffixes
5631In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5632constant by
5633@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5634@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5635@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5636@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5637@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5638@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5639@tex
5640${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5641@end tex
5642@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5643respectively. For example, the following
5644all refer to the same quantity:
5645
252b5132 5646@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5647_fourk_1 = 4K;
5648_fourk_2 = 4096;
5649_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5650_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5651@end smallexample
5652
8a308ae8
NC
5653Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5654conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5655
0c71d759
NC
5656@node Symbolic Constants
5657@subsection Symbolic Constants
5658@cindex symbolic constants
5659@kindex CONSTANT
5660It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5661the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5662
5663@table @code
5664@item MAXPAGESIZE
5665@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5666The target's maximum page size.
5667
5668@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5669@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5670The target's default page size.
5671@end table
5672
5673So for example:
5674
5675@smallexample
9d5777a3 5676 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5677@end smallexample
5678
5679will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5680supported by the target.
5681
252b5132
RH
5682@node Symbols
5683@subsection Symbol Names
5684@cindex symbol names
5685@cindex names
5686@cindex quoted symbol names
5687@kindex "
5688Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5689and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5690Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5691specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5692keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5693@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5694"SECTION" = 9;
5695"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5696@end smallexample
5697
5698Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5699to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5700whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5701
ecca9871
L
5702@node Orphan Sections
5703@subsection Orphan Sections
5704@cindex orphan
5705Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5706are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5707script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5708output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5709placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5710attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5711same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5712If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5713at the end of the file.
5714
5715For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5716well as section flag.
5717
c005eb9e
AB
5718The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5719(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5720output sections an orphan is placed in.
5721
41911f68 5722If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5723the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5724__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5725section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5726orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5727representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5728character.
5729
252b5132
RH
5730@node Location Counter
5731@subsection The Location Counter
5732@kindex .
5733@cindex dot
5734@cindex location counter
5735@cindex current output location
5736The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5737current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5738location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5739within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5740anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5741
5742@cindex holes
5743Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5744moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5745location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5746and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5747doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5748
5749@smallexample
5750SECTIONS
5751@{
5752 output :
5753 @{
5754 file1(.text)
5755 . = . + 1000;
5756 file2(.text)
5757 . += 1000;
5758 file3(.text)
563e308f 5759 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5760@}
5761@end smallexample
5762@noindent
5763In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5764located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5765followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5766@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5767@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5768specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5769
5c6bbab8
NC
5770@cindex dot inside sections
5771Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5772current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5773statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5774absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5775however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5776not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5777
5778@smallexample
5779SECTIONS
5780@{
5781 . = 0x100
5782 .text: @{
5783 *(.text)
5784 . = 0x200
5785 @}
5786 . = 0x500
5787 .data: @{
5788 *(.data)
5789 . += 0x600
5790 @}
5791@}
5792@end smallexample
5793
5794The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5795and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5796the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5797much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5798move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5799and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5800the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5801the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5802
b5666f2f
AM
5803@cindex dot outside sections
5804Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5805output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5806needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5807
5808@smallexample
5809SECTIONS
5810@{
5811 start_of_text = . ;
5812 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5813 end_of_text = . ;
5814
5815 start_of_data = . ;
5816 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5817 end_of_data = . ;
5818@}
5819@end smallexample
5820
5821If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5822not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5823between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5824should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5825blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5826the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5827sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5828statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5829special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5830place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5831as follows:
5832
5833@smallexample
5834SECTIONS
5835@{
5836 start_of_text = . ;
5837 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5838 end_of_text = . ;
5839
5840 start_of_data = . ;
5841 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5842 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5843 end_of_data = . ;
5844@}
5845@end smallexample
5846
5847This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5848@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5849placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5850assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5851a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5852section. So you could write:
5853
5854@smallexample
5855SECTIONS
5856@{
5857 start_of_text = . ;
5858 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5859 end_of_text = . ;
5860
5861 . = . ;
5862 start_of_data = . ;
5863 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5864 end_of_data = . ;
5865@}
5866@end smallexample
5867
5868Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5869@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5870
252b5132
RH
5871@need 2000
5872@node Operators
5873@subsection Operators
5874@cindex operators for arithmetic
5875@cindex arithmetic operators
5876@cindex precedence in expressions
5877The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5878the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5879@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5880@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5881@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5882@smallexample
5883precedence associativity Operators Notes
5884(highest)
58851 left ! - ~ (1)
58862 left * / %
58873 left + -
58884 left >> <<
58895 left == != > < <= >=
58906 left &
58917 left |
58928 left &&
58939 left ||
589410 right ? :
589511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5896(lowest)
5897@end smallexample
5898Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5899(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5900(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5901@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5902@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5903@tex
5904\vskip \baselineskip
5905%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5906\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5907\hrule
5908\halign
5909{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5910height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5911&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5912height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5913\noalign{\hrule}
5914height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5915&highest&&&&&\cr
5916% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5917&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5918&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5919&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5920&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5921&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5922&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5923&7&&left&&|&\cr
5924&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5925&9&&left&&||&\cr
5926&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5927&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5928&lowest&&&&&\cr
5929height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5930\hrule}
5931@end tex
5932@iftex
5933{
5934@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5935@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5936@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5937}
5938@end iftex
5939@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5940
5941@node Evaluation
5942@subsection Evaluation
5943@cindex lazy evaluation
5944@cindex expression evaluation order
5945The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5946an expression when absolutely necessary.
5947
5948The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5949address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5950regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5951as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5952
5953However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5954until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5955other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5956for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5957
5958The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5959assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5960allocation.
5961
5962Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5963@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5964
5965If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5966available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5967following
5968@smallexample
5969@group
5970SECTIONS
5971 @{
a1ab1d2a 5972 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5973 @{ *(.text) @}
5974 @}
5975@end group
5976@end smallexample
5977@noindent
5978will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5979address}.
5980
5981@node Expression Section
5982@subsection The Section of an Expression
5983@cindex expression sections
5984@cindex absolute expressions
5985@cindex relative expressions
5986@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5987@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5988@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5989Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5990relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5991using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5992value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5993symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5994operations.
5995
abf4be64
AM
5996Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5997section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5998address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5999@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6000functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6001One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6002(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6003differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6004versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6005section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6006Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6007absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6008given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6009everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6010
6011In the following simple example,
252b5132 6012
7542af2a
AM
6013@smallexample
6014@group
6015SECTIONS
6016 @{
6017 . = 0x100;
6018 __executable_start = 0x100;
6019 .data :
6020 @{
6021 . = 0x10;
6022 __data_start = 0x10;
6023 *(.data)
6024 @}
6025 @dots{}
6026 @}
6027@end group
6028@end smallexample
252b5132 6029
7542af2a
AM
6030both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6031address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6032@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6033section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6034
5c3049d2
AM
6035For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6036addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6037
6038@itemize @bullet
6039@item
c05f749e
AM
6040Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6041operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6042absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6043@item
7542af2a
AM
6044Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6045relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6046and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6047@item
c05f749e
AM
6048Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6049in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6050address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6051before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6052@end itemize
6053
6054The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6055
6056@itemize @bullet
6057@item
6058An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6059@item
6060The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6061@item
9bc8bb33 6062The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6063relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6064(after above conversions) is also a number when
6065@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6066but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6067@item
6068The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6069relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6070section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6071@item
6072The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6073conversions) is an absolute address.
6074@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6075
6076You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6077to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6078create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6079section @samp{.data}:
6080@smallexample
6081SECTIONS
6082 @{
6083 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6084 @}
6085@end smallexample
6086@noindent
6087If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6088@samp{.data} section.
6089
7542af2a
AM
6090Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6091particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6092
252b5132
RH
6093@node Builtin Functions
6094@subsection Builtin Functions
6095@cindex functions in expressions
6096The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6097use in linker script expressions.
6098
6099@table @code
6100@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6101@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6102@cindex expression, absolute
6103Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6104of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6105value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6106normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6107
6108@item ADDR(@var{section})
6109@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6110@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6111Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6112script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6113the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6114@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6115@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6116the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6117@smallexample
6118@group
6119SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6120 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6121 @{
252b5132
RH
6122 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6123 @dots{}
6124 @}
6125 .output :
6126 @{
6127 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6128 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6129 @}
6130@dots{} @}
6131@end group
6132@end smallexample
6133
876f4090
NS
6134@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6135@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6136@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6137@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6138@cindex round up location counter
6139@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6140@cindex round up expression
6141@cindex align expression
6142Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6143to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6144doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6145arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6146expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6147equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6148
6149Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6150next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6151variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6152input sections:
252b5132
RH
6153@smallexample
6154@group
6155SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6156 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6157 *(.data)
6158 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6159 @}
6160@dots{} @}
6161@end group
6162@end smallexample
6163@noindent
6164The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6165a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6166a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6167of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6168
6169The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6170
362c1d1a
NS
6171@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6172@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6173@cindex section alignment
6174Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6175been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6176evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6177the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6178value in that section.
6179@smallexample
6180@group
6181SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6182 .output @{
6183 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6184 @dots{}
6185 @}
6186@dots{} @}
6187@end group
6188@end smallexample
6189
252b5132
RH
6190@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6191@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6192This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6193scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6194section.
6195
2d20f7bf
JJ
6196@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6197@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6198This is equivalent to either
6199@smallexample
6200(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6201@end smallexample
6202or
6203@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6204(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6205 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6206@end smallexample
6207@noindent
6208depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6209for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6210@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6211If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6212memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6213bytes in the on-disk file.
6214
6215This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6216any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6217@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6218be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6219working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6220
6221@noindent
6222Example:
6223@smallexample
6224 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6225@end smallexample
6226
6227@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6228@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6229This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6230evaluation purposes.
6231
6232@smallexample
6233 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6234@end smallexample
6235
a4f5ad88
JJ
6236@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6237@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6238This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6239@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6240When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6241does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6242@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6243boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6244it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6245@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6246padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6247section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6248
6249@smallexample
6250 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6251@end smallexample
6252
252b5132
RH
6253@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6254@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6255@cindex symbol defaults
6256Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6257defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6258return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6259default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6260shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6261the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6262existed, its value is preserved:
6263
6264@smallexample
6265@group
6266SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6267 .text : @{
6268 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6269 @dots{}
6270 @}
6271 @dots{}
6272@}
6273@end group
6274@end smallexample
6275
3ec57632
NC
6276@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6277@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6278Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6279
252b5132
RH
6280@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6281@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6282@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6283Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6284Section LMA}).
6285
2e53f7d6
NC
6286@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6287@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6288Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6289@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6290
252b5132
RH
6291@kindex MAX
6292@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6293Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6294
6295@kindex MIN
6296@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6297Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6298
6299@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6300@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6301@cindex unallocated address, next
6302Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6303This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6304use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6305output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6306
3ec57632
NC
6307@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6308@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6309Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6310
ba916c8a
MM
6311@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6312@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6313Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6314value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6315@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6316will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6317can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6318``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6319name.
6320
252b5132
RH
6321@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6322@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6323@cindex section size
6324Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6325been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6326evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6327@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6328@smallexample
6329@group
6330SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6331 .output @{
6332 .start = . ;
6333 @dots{}
6334 .end = . ;
6335 @}
6336 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6337 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6338@dots{} @}
6339@end group
6340@end smallexample
6341
6342@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6343@itemx sizeof_headers
6344@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6345@cindex header size
6346Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6347information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6348this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6349choose, to facilitate paging.
6350
6351@cindex not enough room for program headers
6352@cindex program headers, not enough room
6353When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6354@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6355number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6356addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6357additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6358room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6359the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6360script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6361you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6362command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6363@end table
6364
6365@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6366@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6367@cindex implicit linker scripts
6368If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6369an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6370linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6371linker will report an error.
6372
6373An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6374
6375Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6376assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6377commands.
6378
6379Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6380at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6381read. This can affect archive searching.
6382
6383@ifset GENERIC
6384@node Machine Dependent
6385@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6386
6387@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6388@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6389sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6390functionality are not listed.
6391
6392@menu
36f63dca
NC
6393@ifset H8300
6394* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6395@end ifset
6396@ifset I960
6397* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6398@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6399@ifset M68HC11
6400* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6401@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6402@ifset ARM
6403* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6404@end ifset
6405@ifset HPPA
6406* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6407@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6408@ifset M68K
6409* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6410@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6411@ifset MIPS
6412* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6413@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6414@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6415* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6416@end ifset
2469cfa2 6417@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6418* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6419@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6420@ifset NDS32
6421* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6422@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6423@ifset NIOSII
6424* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6425@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6426@ifset POWERPC
6427* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6428@end ifset
6429@ifset POWERPC64
6430* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6431@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6432@ifset SPU
6433* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6434@end ifset
74459f0e 6435@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6436* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6437@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6438@ifset WIN32
6439* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6440@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6441@ifset XTENSA
6442* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6443@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6444@end menu
6445@end ifset
6446
252b5132
RH
6447@ifset H8300
6448@ifclear GENERIC
6449@raisesections
6450@end ifclear
6451
6452@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6453@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6454
6455@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6456For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6457you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6458
6459@table @emph
6460@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6461@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6462@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6463targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6464program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6465respectively.
6466
6467@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6468@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6469@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6470@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6471sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6472page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6473(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6474@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6475top page of memory).
1502569c 6476
81f5558e
NC
6477@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6478indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6479displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6480the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6481@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6482whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6483range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6484
1502569c 6485@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6486@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6487biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6488which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6489page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6490(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6491@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6492the top page of memory).
6493
6494@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6495@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
649632 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6497changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6498(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6499@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6500the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6501@end table
6502
6503@ifclear GENERIC
6504@lowersections
6505@end ifclear
6506@end ifset
6507
36f63dca 6508@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6509@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6510@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6511@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6512@node Renesas
6513@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6514
c2dcd04e
NC
6515@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6516H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6517options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6518@end ifset
6519@end ifclear
6520
6521@ifset I960
6522@ifclear GENERIC
6523@raisesections
6524@end ifclear
6525
6526@node i960
6527@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6528
6529@cindex i960 support
6530
6531You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6532specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6533family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6534incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6535linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6536libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6537search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6538
6539For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6540well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6541paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6542the names
6543
6544@smallexample
6545@group
6546try
6547libtry.a
6548tryca
6549libtryca.a
6550@end group
6551@end smallexample
6552
6553@noindent
6554The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6555two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6556
6557You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6558the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6559use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6560specifies a library.
6561
6562@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6563@cindex relaxing on i960
6564@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6565you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6566@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6567them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6568instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6569instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6570target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6571not itself call any subroutines).
6572
6573@ifclear GENERIC
6574@lowersections
6575@end ifclear
6576@end ifset
6577
6578@ifset ARM
6579@ifclear GENERIC
6580@raisesections
6581@end ifclear
6582
93fd0973
SC
6583@ifset M68HC11
6584@ifclear GENERIC
6585@raisesections
6586@end ifclear
6587
6588@node M68HC11/68HC12
6589@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6590
6591@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6592
6593@subsection Linker Relaxation
6594
6595For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6596optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6597
6598@table @emph
6599@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6600@item relaxing address modes
6601@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6602targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6603program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6604respectively.
6605
6606@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6607transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6608page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6609
6610@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6611When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6612of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6613addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6614@code{bset} instructions.
6615
6616@end table
6617
6618@subsection Trampoline Generation
6619
6620@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6621@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6622For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6623call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6624will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6625trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6626case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6627point to the function trampoline.
6628
6629@ifclear GENERIC
6630@lowersections
6631@end ifclear
6632@end ifset
6633
36f63dca 6634@node ARM
3674e28a 6635@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6636
6637@cindex ARM interworking support
6638@kindex --support-old-code
6639For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6640between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6641been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6642line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6643libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6644option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6645given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6646which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6647the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6648non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6649
6650@cindex thumb entry point
6651@cindex entry point, thumb
6652@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6653The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6654@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6655But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6656branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6657executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6658
ce11ba6c
KT
6659@cindex PE import table prefixing
6660@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6661The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6662the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6663element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6664import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6665
e489d0ae
PB
6666@cindex BE8
6667@kindex --be8
6668The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6669executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6670objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6671option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6672little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6673
3674e28a
PB
6674@cindex TARGET1
6675@kindex --target1-rel
6676@kindex --target1-abs
6677The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6678@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6679or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6680and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6681
6682@cindex TARGET2
6683@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6684The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6685@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6686meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6687@table @samp
6688@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6689@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6690@item abs
6691@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6692@item got-rel
6693@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6694@end table
6695
319850b4
JB
6696@cindex FIX_V4BX
6697@kindex --fix-v4bx
6698The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6699specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6700interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6701also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6702
6703In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6704linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6705@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6706
6707In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6708relocations are ignored.
6709
845b51d6
PB
6710@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6711@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6712Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6713relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6714
6715@smallexample
6716TST rM, #1
6717MOVEQ PC, rM
6718BX Rn
6719@end smallexample
6720
6721This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6722and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6723condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6724
33bfe774
JB
6725@cindex USE_BLX
6726@kindex --use-blx
6727The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6728BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6729situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6730code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6731each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6732
6733This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6734specify it if you are using that target.
6735
c6dd86c6
JB
6736@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6737@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6738The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6739bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6740instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6741to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6742the support code can read the intended values.
6743
6744The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6745intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6746and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6747intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6748full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6749you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6750
6751If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6752enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6753@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6754mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6755vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6756@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6757
6758If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6759potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6760such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6761first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6762instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6763the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6764are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6765
2de70689
MGD
6766@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6767@kindex --fix-arm1176
6768@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6769The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6770in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6771are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6772unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6773
9d5777a3 6774Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6775Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6776http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6777
a504d23a
LA
6778@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6779@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6780
6781The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6782workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6783the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6784off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6785the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6786core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6787integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6788VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6789
6790The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6791necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6792
6793The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6794@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6795STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6796linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6797@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6798
6799If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6800potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6801such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6802replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6803branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6804then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6805
6806The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6807the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6808
6809The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6810they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6811there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6812occurs.
6813
6814The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6815PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6816large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6817cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6818occurs.
6819
bf21ed78
MS
6820@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6821@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6822The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6823warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6824enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6825linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6826using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6827not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6828
6829@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6830@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6831The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6832warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6833@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6834linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6835using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6836
726150b7
NC
6837@cindex PIC_VENEER
6838@kindex --pic-veneer
6839The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6840ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6841is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6842@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6843
6844@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6845@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6846The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6847code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6848perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6849placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6850controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6851The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6852duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6853group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6854code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6855where they should be placed.
6856
6857The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6858@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6859placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6860branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6861placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6862value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6863exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6864A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6865linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6866from the input sections.
6867
6868The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6869@samp{N = +1}.
6870
1a51c1a4
NC
6871Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6872only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6873otherwise.
6874
1db37fe6
YG
6875@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6876@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6877@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6878The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6879
6880The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6881
68fcca92
JW
6882@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6883@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6884@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6885The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6886
6887Please contact ARM for further details.
6888
1db37fe6
YG
6889@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6890@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6891@cindex Merging exidx entries
6892The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6893
6894@kindex --long-plt
6895@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6896The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6897which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6898entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6899
1f56df9d
JW
6900@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6901@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6902The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6903link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6904
4ba2ef8f
TP
6905@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6906All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6907Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6908@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6909veneers in memory.
6910
54ddd295
TP
6911@kindex --cmse-implib
6912@cindex Secure gateway import library
6913The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6914specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6915secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6916executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6917
0955507f
TP
6918@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6919@cindex Input import library
6920The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6921must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6922given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6923in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6924@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6925library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6926library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6927for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6928specified.
6929
36f63dca
NC
6930@ifclear GENERIC
6931@lowersections
6932@end ifclear
6933@end ifset
6934
6935@ifset HPPA
6936@ifclear GENERIC
6937@raisesections
6938@end ifclear
6939
6940@node HPPA ELF32
6941@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6942@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6943@kindex --multi-subspace
6944When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6945import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6946The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6947stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6948multiple sub-spaces.
6949
6950@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6951@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6952Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6953stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6954@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6955sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6956a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6957the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6958conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6959prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6960A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6961branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6962@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6963@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6964detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6965positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6966
6967Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6968single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6969create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6970large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6971
6972@ifclear GENERIC
6973@lowersections
6974@end ifclear
6975@end ifset
6976
7fb9f789
NC
6977@ifset M68K
6978@ifclear GENERIC
6979@raisesections
6980@end ifclear
6981
6982@node M68K
6983@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6984
6985@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6986@kindex --got=@var{type}
6987The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6988The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6989@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6990the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6991@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6992entries only at non-negative offsets.
6993@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6994entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6995support such GOTs.
6996@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6997output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6998file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6999files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7000
7001@ifclear GENERIC
7002@lowersections
7003@end ifclear
7004@end ifset
7005
833794fc
MR
7006@ifset MIPS
7007@ifclear GENERIC
7008@raisesections
7009@end ifclear
7010
7011@node MIPS
7012@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7013
7014@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7015@kindex --insn32
7016@kindex --no-insn32
7017The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7018microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7019in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7020used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7021or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7022including 16-bit ones where possible.
7023
7024@ifclear GENERIC
7025@lowersections
7026@end ifclear
7027@end ifset
7028
36f63dca
NC
7029@ifset MMIX
7030@ifclear GENERIC
7031@raisesections
7032@end ifclear
7033
7034@node MMIX
7035@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7036For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7037@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7038understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7039can translate between the two formats.
7040
7041There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7042Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7043registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7044equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7045@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7046global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7047this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7048symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7049
7a2de473
HPN
7050Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7051@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7052The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7053of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7054
7055Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7056are left out from an mmo file.
7057
7058@ifclear GENERIC
7059@lowersections
7060@end ifclear
7061@end ifset
7062
7063@ifset MSP430
7064@ifclear GENERIC
7065@raisesections
7066@end ifclear
7067
7068@node MSP430
7069@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7070For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7071will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7072just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7073
7074@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7075The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7076
7077@table @code
7078@item @samp{.vectors}
7079Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7080
7081@item @samp{.bootloader}
7082Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7083in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7084
7085@item @samp{.infomem}
7086Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7087this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7088
c0065db7 7089@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7090This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7091in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7092
7093@item @samp{.noinit}
7094Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7095
c0065db7 7096The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7097@end table
7098
7099@ifclear GENERIC
7100@lowersections
7101@end ifclear
7102@end ifset
7103
35c08157
KLC
7104@ifset NDS32
7105@ifclear GENERIC
7106@raisesections
7107@end ifclear
7108
7109@node NDS32
7110@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7111@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7112For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7113relaxes objects according to these options.
7114
7115@table @code
7116@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7117Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7118
7119@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7120Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7121
7122@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7123Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7124
7125@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7126Export the EX9 table after linking.
7127
7128@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7129Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7130
7131@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7132Update the existing EX9 table.
7133
7134@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7135Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7136
7137@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7138Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7139
7140@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7141Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7142
7143@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7144Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7145@end table
7146
7147@ifclear GENERIC
7148@lowersections
7149@end ifclear
7150@end ifset
7151
78058a5e
SL
7152@ifset NIOSII
7153@ifclear GENERIC
7154@raisesections
7155@end ifclear
7156
7157@node Nios II
7158@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7159@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7160@kindex --relax on Nios II
7161
7162Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7163transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7164which may result in @command{ld} giving
7165@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7166The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7167trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7168outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7169trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7170be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7171larger than 256MB.
7172
7173The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7174is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7175@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7176locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7177source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7178register as a temporary.
7179
7180Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7181relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7182option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7183
7184@ifclear GENERIC
7185@lowersections
7186@end ifclear
7187@end ifset
7188
2a60a7a8
AM
7189@ifset POWERPC
7190@ifclear GENERIC
7191@raisesections
7192@end ifclear
7193
7194@node PowerPC ELF32
7195@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7196@cindex PowerPC long branches
7197@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7198Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7199displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7200@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7201@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7202the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7203section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7204section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7205@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7206both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7207considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7208
7209@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7210@table @option
7211@cindex PowerPC PLT
7212@kindex --bss-plt
7213@item --bss-plt
7214Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7215generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7216the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7217writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7218@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7219PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7220compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7221BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7222
016687f8
AM
7223@kindex --secure-plt
7224@item --secure-plt
7225@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7226@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7227when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7228layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7229style BSS PLT.
7230
2a60a7a8
AM
7231@cindex PowerPC GOT
7232@kindex --sdata-got
7233@item --sdata-got
7234The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7235sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7236@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7237section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7238@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7239@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7240@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7241@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7242PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7243pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7244GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7245really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7246
7247@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7248@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7249@item --emit-stub-syms
7250This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7251symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7252
7253@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7254@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7255@item --no-tls-optimize
7256PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7257sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7258disable the optimization.
7259@end table
7260
7261@ifclear GENERIC
7262@lowersections
7263@end ifclear
7264@end ifset
7265
7266@ifset POWERPC64
7267@ifclear GENERIC
7268@raisesections
7269@end ifclear
7270
7271@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7272@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7273
7274@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7275@table @option
7276@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7277@kindex --stub-group-size
7278@item --stub-group-size
7279Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7280by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7281@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7282sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7283a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7284the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7285conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7286prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7287A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7288branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7289@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7290@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7291detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7292positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7293
7294Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7295single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7296create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7297large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7298
7299@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7300@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7301@item --emit-stub-syms
7302This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7303symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7304
7305@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7306@kindex --dotsyms
7307@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7308@item --dotsyms
7309@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7310These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7311in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7312function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7313code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7314properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7315to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7316@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7317dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7318feature.
7319
7ae4ea7d
AM
7320@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7321@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7322@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7323@item --save-restore-funcs
7324@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7325These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7326provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7327@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7328function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7329link.
7330
2a60a7a8
AM
7331@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7332@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7333@item --no-tls-optimize
7334PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7335sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7336disable the optimization.
7337
7c9cf415
AM
7338@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7339@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7340@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7341@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7342@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7343These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7344stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7345an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7346@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7347stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7348option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7349Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7350slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7351application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7352normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7353
2a60a7a8
AM
7354@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7355@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7356@item --no-opd-optimize
7357PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7358corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7359the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7360Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7361
7362@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7363@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7364@item --non-overlapping-opd
7365Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7366@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7367the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7368entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7369
7370@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7371@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7372@item --no-toc-optimize
7373PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7374entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7375reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7376marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7377marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7378relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7379unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7380reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7381discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7382reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7383code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7384optimization.
7385
7386@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7387@kindex --no-multi-toc
7388@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7389If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7390@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7391where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7392entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7393total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7394grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7395TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7396calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7397help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
739864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7399Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7400
7401@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7402@kindex --no-toc-sort
7403@item --no-toc-sort
7404By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7405happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7406placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7407with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7408referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7409@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7410results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7411off this feature.
7412
7413@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7414@kindex --plt-align
7415@kindex --no-plt-align
7416@item --plt-align
7417@itemx --no-plt-align
7418Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7419padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7420specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7421that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7422stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7423
7424@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7425@kindex --plt-static-chain
7426@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7427@item --plt-static-chain
7428@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7429Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7430chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7431chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7432
7433@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7434@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7435@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7436@item --plt-thread-safe
7437@itemx --no-thread-safe
7438With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7439lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7440another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7441order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7442memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7443barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7444looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7445seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7446default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7447@end table
7448
7449@ifclear GENERIC
7450@lowersections
7451@end ifclear
7452@end ifset
7453
49fa1e15
AM
7454@ifset SPU
7455@ifclear GENERIC
7456@raisesections
7457@end ifclear
7458
7459@node SPU ELF
7460@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7461
7462@cindex SPU ELF options
7463@table @option
7464
7465@cindex SPU plugins
7466@kindex --plugin
7467@item --plugin
7468This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7469
7470@cindex SPU overlays
7471@kindex --no-overlays
7472@item --no-overlays
7473Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7474regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7475@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7476turns off all this special overlay handling.
7477
7478@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7479@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7480@item --emit-stub-syms
7481This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7482symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7483
7484@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7485@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7486@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7487This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7488function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7489on calls to non-overlay regions.
7490
7491@cindex SPU local store size
7492@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7493@item --local-store=lo:hi
7494@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7495the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7496range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7497
c0065db7 7498@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7499@kindex --stack-analysis
7500@item --stack-analysis
7501SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7502unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7503under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7504@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7505@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7506determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7507for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7508for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7509for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7510find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7511and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7512under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7513dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7514is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7515and calls will be given.
7516
c0065db7 7517@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7518@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7519@item --emit-stack-syms
7520This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7521in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7522These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7523functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7524functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7525such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7526The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7527@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7528@end table
7529
7530@ifclear GENERIC
7531@lowersections
7532@end ifclear
7533@end ifset
7534
36f63dca
NC
7535@ifset TICOFF
7536@ifclear GENERIC
7537@raisesections
7538@end ifclear
7539
7540@node TI COFF
7541@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7542@cindex TI COFF versions
7543@kindex --format=@var{version}
7544The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7545TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7546also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7547format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7548header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7549
7550@ifclear GENERIC
7551@lowersections
7552@end ifclear
7553@end ifset
7554
2ca22b03
NC
7555@ifset WIN32
7556@ifclear GENERIC
7557@raisesections
7558@end ifclear
7559
7560@node WIN32
7561@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7562
c0065db7 7563This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7564See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7565command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7566
7567@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7568@cindex import libraries
7569@item import libraries
69da35b5 7570The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7571libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7572regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7573archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7574support for creating such libraries provided with the
7575@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7576
c0065db7
RM
7577@item exporting DLL symbols
7578@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7579The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7580
7581@table @emph
7582@item using auto-export functionality
7583@cindex using auto-export functionality
7584By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7585which is controlled by the following command line options:
7586
0a5d968e
NC
7587@itemize
7588@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7589@item --exclude-symbols
7590@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7591@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7592@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7593@end itemize
7594
09e2aba4
DK
7595When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7596(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7597symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7598often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7599private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7600options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7601exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7602final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7603
7604If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7605command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7606if either of the following are true:
7607
7608@itemize
7609@item A DEF file is used.
7610@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7611@end itemize
dc8465bf 7612
c0065db7
RM
7613@item using a DEF file
7614@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7615Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7616an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7617exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7618name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7619command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7620
7621@example
7622gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7623@end example
7624
0a5d968e
NC
7625Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7626@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7627
dc8465bf
NC
7628Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7629
7630@example
4b5bd4e7 7631LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7632
7633EXPORTS
7634foo
7635bar
7636_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7637another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7638var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7639doo = foo == foo2
7640eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7641@end example
dc8465bf 7642
7fcab871 7643This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7644symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7645alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7646by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7647@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7648@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7649export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7650in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7651symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7652
6b31ad16
DS
7653The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7654name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7655the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7656
b45619c0
NC
7657When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7658library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7659@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7660executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7661
7662With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7663specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7664non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7665
7666If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7667or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7668filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7669
4b5bd4e7
DS
7670The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7671
7672@example
7673EXPORTS
7674 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7675 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7676 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7677@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7678
7679Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7680@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7681@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7682@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7683Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7684@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7685string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7686
7687The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7688
7689@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7690will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7691by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7692linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7693library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7694
7695@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7696The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7697the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7698@code{*_imp__foo}).
7699
7700@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7701well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7702read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7703variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7704the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7705extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7706application will behave unexpectedly.
7707
7708@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7709it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7710symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7711API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7712the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7713
4b5bd4e7
DS
7714See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7715other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7716
7717@cindex creating a DEF file
7718While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7719with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7720
7721@item Using decorations
7722@cindex Using decorations
7723Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7724itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7725declared as:
7726
7727@example
7728__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7729__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7730@end example
7731
7732All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7733any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7734this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7735the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7736
7737Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7738decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7739instead:
7740
7741@example
7742__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7743__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7744@end example
7745
c0065db7
RM
7746This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7747when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7748variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7749code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7750of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7751omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7752@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7753information.
c0065db7 7754@end table
dc8465bf 7755
2ca22b03
NC
7756@cindex automatic data imports
7757@item automatic data imports
7758The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7759by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7760compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7761issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7762code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7763c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7764initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7765decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7766platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7767command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7768The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7769suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7770trigger the feature's use.
7771
c0065db7 7772auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7773additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7774
c0065db7 7775"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7776documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7777
c0065db7
RM
7778The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7779occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7780One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7781below.
7782
7783@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7784For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7785object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7786offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7787field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7788in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7789without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7790The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7791references.
7792
c0065db7
RM
7793The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7794be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7795themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7796runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7797compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7798support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7799run without error on an older system.
7800
c0065db7
RM
7801@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7802enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7803
7804@cindex direct linking to a dll
7805@item direct linking to a dll
7806The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7807including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7808libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7809traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7810libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7811function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7812though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7813storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7814tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7815large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7816
c0065db7 7817Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7818@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7819of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7820perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7821select the dll instead of an import library.
7822
2ca22b03 7823
69da35b5
NC
7824For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7825to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7826
7827@example
45e948fe
NC
7828libxxx.dll.a
7829xxx.dll.a
7830libxxx.a
7831xxx.lib
69da35b5 7832cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7833libxxx.dll
7834xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7835@end example
7836
69da35b5
NC
7837before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7838
c0065db7
RM
7839(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7840where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7841@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7842file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7843@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7844
c0065db7
RM
7845Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7846@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7847was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7848various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7849could coexist on the same machine.
7850
2ca22b03
NC
7851The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7852applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7853libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7854
7855@example
7856bin/
7857 cygxxx.dll
7858lib/
7859 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7860 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7861@end example
7862
c0065db7
RM
7863Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7864done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7865
78661. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7867@example
7868gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7869@end example
2ca22b03 7870
69da35b5
NC
7871However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7872(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7873@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7874not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7875
2ca22b03
NC
78762. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7877directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7878should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7879making the app/dll.
7880
7881@example
7882ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7883@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7884
7885Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7886
7887@example
7888gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7889@end example
69da35b5
NC
7890
7891This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7892perfectly legal
7893
7894@example
7895bin/
7896 cygxxx-5.dll
7897lib/
c0065db7 7898 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7899@end example
7900
dc8465bf 7901Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7902even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7903@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7904
7905Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7906wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7907
79081. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7909work with auto-imported data.
7910
dc8465bf
NC
79112. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7912import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7913symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7914for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7915possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7916
45e948fe
NC
79173. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7918critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7919in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7920stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7921
69da35b5 7922So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7923true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7924a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7925binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7926massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7927requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7928will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7929
c0065db7 7930@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7931@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7932@item adding additional names
7933Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7934A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7935exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7936when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7937import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7938
c0065db7 7939@example
dc8465bf
NC
7940LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7941
7942EXPORTS
c0065db7 7943foo
dc8465bf 7944_foo = foo
c0065db7 7945@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7946
7947The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7948
7949Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7950source code using the "weak" attribute:
7951
c0065db7
RM
7952@example
7953void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7954void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7955@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7956
7957See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7958symbols.
7959
7960@item renaming symbols
7961Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7962kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7963@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7964DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7965created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7966
c0065db7 7967@example
dc8465bf
NC
7968LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7969
7970EXPORTS
7971_foo = foo
c0065db7 7972@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7973
7974The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7975@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7976@end table
dc8465bf 7977
0a5d968e 7978Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7979unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7980If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7981@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7982that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7983@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7984renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7985to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7986the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7987In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7988which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7989
7990@cindex weak externals
7991@item weak externals
7992The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7993weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7994defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7995are three variants of weak externals:
7996@itemize
7997@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7998called lazy externals.
7999@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8000This form is not presently implemented.
8001@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8002implemented.
8003@end itemize
8004As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8005are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8006uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8007
8008@cindex aligned common symbols
8009@item aligned common symbols
8010As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8011desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8012the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8013carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8014by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8015tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8016but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8017warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8018
2ca22b03
NC
8019@end table
8020
8021@ifclear GENERIC
8022@lowersections
8023@end ifclear
8024@end ifset
8025
e0001a05
NC
8026@ifset XTENSA
8027@ifclear GENERIC
8028@raisesections
8029@end ifclear
8030
8031@node Xtensa
8032@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8033
8034@cindex Xtensa processors
8035The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8036@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8037specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8038keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8039example, with the command:
8040
8041@smallexample
8042SECTIONS
8043@{
8044 .text : @{
8045 *(.literal .text)
8046 @}
8047@}
8048@end smallexample
8049
8050@noindent
8051@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8052and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8053literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8054interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8055group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8056files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8057and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8058
43cd72b9 8059@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8060@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8061Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8062provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8063is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8064literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8065will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8066location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8067the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8068unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8069@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8070range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8071
8072For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8073to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8074instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8075instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8076instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8077@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8078hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8079By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8080switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8081density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8082instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8083performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8084linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8085a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8086
8087The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8088control the linker:
8089
8090@cindex Xtensa options
8091@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8092@item --size-opt
8093When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8094more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8095no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8096alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8097preserve the correctness of the code.
8098@end table
e0001a05
NC
8099
8100@ifclear GENERIC
8101@lowersections
8102@end ifclear
8103@end ifset
8104
252b5132
RH
8105@ifclear SingleFormat
8106@node BFD
8107@chapter BFD
8108
8109@cindex back end
8110@cindex object file management
8111@cindex object formats available
8112@kindex objdump -i
8113The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8114These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8115object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8116format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8117it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8118associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8119object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8120(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8121list all the formats available for your configuration.
8122
8123@cindex BFD requirements
8124@cindex requirements for BFD
8125As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8126several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8127BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8128formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8129been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8130BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8131may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8132
8133One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8134mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8135useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8136conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8137
8138@menu
8139* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8140@end menu
8141
8142@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8143@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8144@cindex opening object files
8145@include bfdsumm.texi
8146@end ifclear
8147
8148@node Reporting Bugs
8149@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8150@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8151@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8152
ff5dcc92 8153Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8154
8155Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8156it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8157to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8158work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8159@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8160
8161In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8162information that enables us to fix the bug.
8163
8164@menu
8165* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8166* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8167@end menu
8168
8169@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8170@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8171@cindex bug criteria
8172
8173If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8174
8175@itemize @bullet
8176@cindex fatal signal
8177@cindex linker crash
8178@cindex crash of linker
8179@item
8180If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8181@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8182
8183@cindex error on valid input
8184@item
ff5dcc92 8185If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8186
8187@cindex invalid input
8188@item
ff5dcc92 8189If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8190may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8191object files are correct.
8192
8193@item
8194If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8195improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8196@end itemize
8197
8198@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8199@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8200@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8201@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8202
8203A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8204products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8205recommend you contact that organization first.
8206
8207You can find contact information for many support companies and
8208individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8209distribution.
8210
ad22bfe8 8211@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8212Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8213@value{BUGURL}.
8214@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8215
8216The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8217@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8218fact or leave it out, state it!
8219
8220Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8221problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8222assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8223matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8224the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8225location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8226were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8227into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8228specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8229and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8230
8231Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8232the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8233on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8234
8235Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8236bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8237respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8238You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8239
8240To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8241
8242@itemize @bullet
8243@item
ff5dcc92 8244The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8245the @samp{--version} argument.
8246
8247Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8248the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8249
8250@item
ff5dcc92 8251Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8252patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8253
8254@item
8255The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8256version number.
8257
8258@item
ff5dcc92 8259What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8260``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8261
8262@item
8263The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8264observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8265list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8266sufficient.
8267
8268If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8269and then we might not encounter the bug.
8270
8271@item
8272A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8273bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8274provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8275bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8276state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8277requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8278we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8279attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8280
8281If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8282@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8283object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8284@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8285how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8286
8287@item
8288A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8289incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8290
ff5dcc92 8291Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8292will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8293not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8294a chance to make a mistake.
8295
8296Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8297say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8298copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8299C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8300and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8301fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8302you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8303any conclusion from our observations.
8304
8305@item
ff5dcc92 8306If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8307diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8308@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8309If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8310context, not by line number.
8311
8312The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8313sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8314@end itemize
8315
8316Here are some things that are not necessary:
8317
8318@itemize @bullet
8319@item
8320A description of the envelope of the bug.
8321
8322Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8323which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8324changes will not affect it.
8325
8326This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8327will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8328with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8329We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8330
8331Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8332of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8333output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8334less time, and so on.
8335
8336However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8337report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8338
8339@item
8340A patch for the bug.
8341
8342A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8343the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8344a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8345to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8346
ff5dcc92 8347Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8348construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8349through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8350able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8351fixed.
8352
8353And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8354patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8355help us to understand.
8356
8357@item
8358A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8359
8360Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8361things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8362@end itemize
8363
8364@node MRI
8365@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8366@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8367To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8368linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8369alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8370described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8371simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8372@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8373linker commands; these commands are described here.
8374
8375In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8376file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8377features to make use of them.
8378
8379You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8380@samp{-c} command-line option.
8381
8382Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8383command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8384blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8385MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8386issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8387
8388Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8389
8390You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8391lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8392The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8393
8394@table @code
8395@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8396@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8397@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8398Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8399the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8400@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8401your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8402script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8403commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8404input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8405@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8406
8407@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8408@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8409Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8410in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8411
8412@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8413
8414@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8415@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8416Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8417@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8418
8419@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8420@item BASE @var{expression}
8421Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8422absolute addresses) in the output file.
8423
8424@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8425@item CHIP @var{expression}
8426@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8427This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8428
8429@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8430@item END
8431This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8432
8433@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8434@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8435Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8436language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8437
8438@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8439@item
252b5132
RH
8440S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8441
8442@item
8443IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8444
8445@item
8446COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8447@samp{COFF}
8448@end enumerate
8449
8450@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8451@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8452Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8453@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8454
8455The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8456same line, with no change in its effect.
8457
8458@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8459@item LOAD @var{filename}
8460@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8461Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8462same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8463command line.
8464
8465@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8466@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8467@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8468MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8469option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8470
8471@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8472@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8473@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8474Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8475order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8476script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8477sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8478file, in the order specified.
8479
8480@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8481@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8482@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8483@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8484Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8485@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8486
8487@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8488@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8489@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8490@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8491You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8492specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8493If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8494@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8495@end table
8496
793c5807
NC
8497@node GNU Free Documentation License
8498@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8499@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8500
370b66a1
CD
8501@node LD Index
8502@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8503
8504@printindex cp
8505
8506@tex
7ca01ed9 8507% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8508% meantime:
8509\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8510\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8511\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8512\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8513\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8514\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8515\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8516\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8517\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8518% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8519@end tex
8520
252b5132 8521@bye